JP6865703B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game such as a pachinko gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, a detection means that can detect the movement of the player, such as a push button, is provided, and the continuous hitting effect that advances the effect in response to the detection of the continuous hitting operation that is the continuous movement of the player. There was something that promoted the production such as. In such a gaming machine, when a player's movement different from the continuous movement such as a long press operation of a push button is detected, the continuous hitting operation is regarded as being executed at predetermined intervals, which is called an automatic continuous hitting operation. (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-180364 (paragraph 0138, etc.)

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine of Patent Document 1, even though the player operates at a speed higher than the deemed continuous operation due to the self-powered continuous operation in a specific state, the player's self-powered continuous operation and the player's The progress of the production did not change according to the motion detection in the deemed continuous motion. As a result, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player cannot feel the significance of continuous operation by himself / herself.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making a player feel the significance of performing continuous operation by himself / herself.

(A) A gaming machine capable of playing games
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
Specific display means to display specific display and
Based on the fact that the detection means detects a predetermined motion of the player different from the continuous motion of the player during the detection valid period of the detection means, the continuous motion deemed determination that the continuous motion is regarded as being executed at a predetermined interval is determined. Action judgment means and
Based on the fact that the continuous movement of the player is detected by the detection means during the detection valid period, it is possible to execute a specific effect capable of changing the effect mode of the specific display in a plurality of stages according to the continuous operation. With a specific production execution means,
Further, the specific effect executing means can change the effect mode of the specific display in a plurality of stages according to the continuous operation at the predetermined interval based on the continuous operation deemed determination by the operation determining means. It is possible to perform specific effects,
The specific effect executing means is
When the specific effect is executed based on the continuous operation deemed determination, the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to a predetermined stage as much as possible, and the interval is shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous operation deemed determination. When the specific effect is executed based on the detection of the continuous movement of the player by the detection means, the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to the maximum up to a specific stage higher than the predetermined stage.
When it is predetermined to execute an effect of changing the effect mode of the specific display to a specified stage higher than the specific stage as the specific effect, the specific display is based on the determination of deemed continuous operation. The specific display is based on the state after the effect mode is changed to the predetermined stage and the continuous operation of the player being detected by the detection means at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous operation deemed determination. In each state after the effect mode has changed to the specific stage, the detection means detects the continuous movement of the player, the detection means does not detect the continuous movement of the player, and the case where the continuous movement of the player is not detected. The production mode of the specific display can be reached to the specified stage.
The specific effect is the detection effect is produced if the representation embodiment has reached the predetermined stage of the particular display during the valid period are possible development in the first representation embodiment, the effect of the specific display in said detecting validity When the aspect reaches the specific stage, the effect mode can be developed into the second effect mode.
The gaming machine may have the following configuration.
(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) capable of playing games.
Detection means (push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and
Specific display means (image display device 5, effect control CPU 120, S261FS013 in FIG. 22-6, S172 in FIG. 7, etc.) for displaying a specific display (meter image 261F001, etc.)
Based on the fact that the detection means detects a predetermined motion of the player different from the continuous motion of the player (self-powered continuous striking, etc.) during the detection valid period of the detection means, it is considered that the continuous motion is executed at a predetermined interval. (Assuming that it is an automatic continuous hit, etc.) An operation determination means (CPU 120 for effect control, S261FS024, etc. in FIG. 22-7) that determines continuous operation is not considered, and
Based on the fact that the player's continuous motion (self-powered continuous striking, etc.) is detected by the detection means during the detection valid period, the effect mode of the specific display is changed in a plurality of steps according to the continuous motion (FIG. 22-). 2 (A), etc.) is provided with specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120, S261FS026, etc. in FIG. 22-7) capable of executing a specific effect (meter effect at the time of continuous striking by oneself, etc.).
Further, the specific effect executing means further changes the effect mode of the specific display in a plurality of stages according to the continuous operation (automatic continuous striking, etc.) at predetermined intervals based on the determination of continuous operation deemed by the operation determining means. It is possible to execute a specific effect (meter effect at the time of automatic continuous striking, etc.) that can be changed (Fig. 22-2 (B), etc.) (S261FS025, etc. in Fig. 22-7).
The specific effect executing means is used by the detection means at intervals shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous operation deemed determination than when the specific effect is executed based on the continuous operation deemed determination. When the specific effect is executed based on the detection of the continuous operation, the specific step in which the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to the maximum is higher (FIGS. 22-2 (A) and 22-2 (B)). As you can see, the maximum change level of the meter effect is higher when you hit it by yourself than when you hit it automatically).
When the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect based on the detection of the player's continuous operation by the detection means at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous operation deemed determination, the specific effect execution means performs the continuous operation. Compared with the case where the specific effect is executed based on the deemed determination, the specific step in which the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to the maximum is increased (FIGS. 22-2 (A) and 22-2 (B)). As you can see, the maximum change level of the meter effect is higher when you hit it by yourself than when you hit it automatically).

With such a configuration, the player can feel the significance of performing continuous movement by himself / herself.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The specific effect can be developed into a plurality of types of predetermined effect modes (first development effect, second development effect, special development effect, etc.) (FIG. 22-1).
Within the detection valid period, the specific display can be displayed depending on whether the specific display effect mode reaches a predetermined stage (level L5) or the specific display effect mode reaches the specific stage (level L10). As shown in FIGS. 22-1 (B) and 22-1 (C), the first development effect can be transferred when the level L5 is reached, and the second development effect can be transferred when the level L10 is reached. Possible etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to promote the player to perform continuous movement by himself / herself.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific effect executing means can bring the effect mode of the specific display to a special stage (level MAX) higher than the specific stage based on the establishment of special conditions (big hit determination, etc.) (FIG. 22-). As shown in 1 (D), it is possible to shift to a special development effect when the level MAX is reached) (Fig. 22-4 (A), (B), Fig. 22-5 (B), (D), etc.).
The special stage is an unreachable effect mode when the specific effect is executed based on the detection of the player's continuous operation by the detection means at intervals shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous operation deemed determination. (As shown in FIGS. 22-5 (A) and 22-5 (C), if the effect pattern to reach the level MAX is not determined, the level MAX cannot be reached even if the player repeatedly hits at high speed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the special condition is not satisfied, even if the player performs continuous operation at too high speed by himself / herself, the special stage is reached on the gaming machine side so that the special stage cannot be reached. It is possible to determine the stages of possible production modes.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
When the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect based on the continuous operation at the predetermined interval due to the determination of the continuous operation deemed to be made based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the specific effect execution means is at the specific stage or higher. It is possible to reach the stage (as shown in FIGS. 22-5 (B) and (D), if the effect pattern to reach the level MAX is determined, the level MAX can be reached even if the automatic repeated hits are performed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who performs the continuous operation based on the determination of the continuous operation as deemed to be uninteresting.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The specific effect executing means is
When a specific condition is satisfied (such as when there is insufficient meter display in S261FS028 of FIG. 22-7), in the specific effect, an effect of finally reaching the specific stage of the effect mode of the specific display is executed. (For example, adjust the meter display with S261FS029 in Fig. 22-7).
When the specific condition is satisfied and the effect mode of the specific display has not reached the specific stage before the execution of the effect of finally reaching the specific stage. Based on the detection of a specific motion (tilting motion of the stick controller 31A, etc.) different from the continuous motion of the player, the degree of change (of the production mode of the specific display according to the continuous motion of the player (continuous striking motion, etc.)) It is possible to execute an effect of changing the effect mode of the specific display with a high degree of change (FIGS. 22-8 (B), (C), etc.).

According to such a configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied, the stage changes too much when the effect of finally reaching the specific stage of the effect mode of the specific display is executed in the specific effect. Even if there is, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of discomfort in the effect of changing the effect mode of the specific display by the effect of changing the effect mode of the specific display based on the detection of the specific operation different from the continuous operation of the player. it can.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state (such as the effect control CPU 120).
It is further provided with a title notification means (such as a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of transmitting a title corresponding to the suggestion effect.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the suggestion effect is executed.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect, and
In the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above,
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (6) to (8) above,
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(10) In the gaming machine of (9) above,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(11) In any of the gaming machines (6) to (10) above,
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(12) In any of the gaming machines (6) to (11) above,
Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and
A specific display execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for performing a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 17 (E) and 18 (I)).
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18 (J) and 18 (K)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(13) In any of the gaming machines (6) to (12) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display having a display size of the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A). Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062 or the like displayed at the time of the reach title production shown in FIG. 19 (d)) (for example, an image). A display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control) are further provided.
The display means
Multiple types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) composed of the above.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Display so that elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be preferably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display monitor in modification 4 and the display content of the display monitor. FIG. 5 is a time chart showing a display time of an item displayed on the display monitor in the modified example 4, and an explanatory diagram for explaining a change in the display content of the display monitor. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process which is executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial roll determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of suggestion effect determination processing during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table, the accessory effect effect determination table, and the light guide plate effect determination table during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. It is a display screen view of the image display device 5 which shows an example of a meter effect. It is a timing chart which shows the detection judgment and the meter display change in each of self-powered continuous hitting and automatic repeated hitting. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used for determining a fluctuation pattern in a tabular form. It is a figure which shows the special development production selection table in a table format. It is a figure which shows the development effect pattern selection table in tabular form. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hitting effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hitting effect processing. FIG. 5 is a display screen view of an image display device 5 showing an example in which a meter display adjustment effect is executed based on a player performing a specific operation different from repeated hits. It is a display screen view of the image display apparatus 5 which shows an example of a plurality of specific image display effect. During the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol, the effect executed when the push button operation is not detected within the operation valid period is different between the first half and the second half of the effect period. It is a display screen view of the image display device which shows. It is a figure which shows the effect pattern selection table used in the latter stage of the effect control by period in a table format. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd continuous hitting effect processing.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, or the operation of the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including hold management), execution of a normal figure game (including hold management), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. When the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super reach B <The order is higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8A shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively fueled and the effect of the effect is improved. The mode of notification of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature section 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 9 and 10 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop, and the reach mode is established. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIG. 9 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other as shown in FIG. 9 (E). The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (here). Then, the characters "SP reach B") are displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. To. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, the titles of Super Reach A (Fig. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made to have a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to identify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 8. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to be completely in agreement with the degree of jackpot reliability of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 9 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. To.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9 (D), (F), (Fig. 9), (F), H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 9H and the like, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and corresponds to the expectation degree. You may want to display the numerical value. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of steps of the degree of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (C), and the big hit combination is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (D). A fixed decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative pattern that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined production, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of is arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays a hold display, an active display, a character that is residently displayed during variable display, and a display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to draw attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 11 (B) shows. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. You may do so. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 9 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first and gradually. It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK0221. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white stars. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expected degree is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted as shown in FIG. 12 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has been completed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Also, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increases at one time, the same image of the black star is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expectation that increases You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 12 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and 12 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 12 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). ) May be different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13 (B). The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed, so that the super reach C is displayed. The title of reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK030 changes to red is executed. In this way, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance notice effect or the development effect, which is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and improves the expectation. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the superreach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Things that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of the change in the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of change timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined as one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16 (B) is used in the special mode. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's lines (for example, the display color of the lines) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. If the display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change between the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title and the dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the decision results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or may be different from the title notice. The rate of change in which production mode (ratio of action) may be different from that of the dialogue notice, or the rate of change in what color (in what stage) may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Eliminate enemies with a stick controller", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a deciding effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is displayed according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

17 and 18 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after the image display device 5 is in the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character 31AK042 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to 17 (F) and 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 changes to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before the predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). , A display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, they are appropriately performed in parallel with the reach effect and operation effect shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification example 2 of feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, after the reach, the production of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach production is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the reliability of the jackpot when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 notifies the speaker 8 to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 emits the light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 19 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19B, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 19 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19E is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When a friendly character wins a battle with an enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of Characteristic Part of This Embodiment)
Next, the feature portion of the present embodiment will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 105SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a game machine frame (underframe) 105SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 105SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 105SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 105SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 105SG003a, and when the glass door frame 105SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 105SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 105SG003 and the glass. The door frame 105SG003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 105SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 105SG051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later, and a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 105SG052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is housed in the board case 105SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 105SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 105SG201.

Since the board case 105SG201 having the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the lock switch 105SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 105SG051. Further, the lock switch 105SG051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) by using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the substrate case 105SG201, a display monitor 105SG029 and a display changeover switch 105SG030 for switching the display of the display monitor 105SG029 are arranged. The display monitor 105SG029 and the display changeover switch 105SG030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 105SG201. That is, the display monitor 105SG029 and the display changeover switch 105SG030 are arranged in front of the board case 105SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 in the present embodiment cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a includes a lock switch 105SG051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. A security cover 105SG500A that covers the right side of the board case 105SG201 from the back side is attached. The curity cover 105SG500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 105SG500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 105SG500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 105SG500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 105SG500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 105SG201. Further, the security cover 105SG500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a via the front end portion of the short piece 105SG500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 105SG500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 105SG201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. As a result, the right side of the board case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are inoperable by the long piece 105SG500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 move together with the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from the long piece 105SG500Ab. By separating the pieces, the covering state of the long piece 105SG500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 105SG500A is released, and the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 105SG201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052 unless the clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 105SG003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A lock switch 105SG051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by allowing an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate to enter between the gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko gaming machines 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 1. And the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may cause fraudulent acts such as changing the set value. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A switches the setting with the lock switch 105SG051. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 105SG052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the game machine frame 105SG003 is closed and the back right side of the board case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is covered by the security cover 105SG500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 105SG500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 105SG201 can be seen through, the state of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

FIG. 20-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 20-4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the numerical value MR3, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random values MR1 to MR1 is not limited to this. The range of MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 20-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "missing", the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 20-5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the present embodiment is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. Has been done. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the present embodiment, these fluctuation patterns are determined after first determining the type of fluctuation pattern, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the specified type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the value varies from the random values for determining the variation pattern type. The type of the pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-5, a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the fluctuation content (effect content) may be different even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value is 3 as the fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to obtain a fluctuation pattern that causes super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 and 20-7, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), and FIG. 20. The display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -6 (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and the jackpot type determination shown in FIG. 20-6 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), and the normal figure display result judgment table (not shown). (Omitted), a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the general map (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. It has become. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the highest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the larger the value in the order of 2 or 3, the lower the advantage is stepwise.

20-6 (A) to 20-6 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/99 and 1 /. While the judgment value is set so that a small hit is won with a probability of 50, if the game state is a probability change state, a big hit is won with a probability of 1 / 9.9, and a small hit is won with a probability of 1/50. The judgment value is set so as to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/150. While the judgment value is set so that the small hit is won with a probability of 1/99, if the gaming state is in a probabilistic state, the big hit is won with a probability of 1/15 and the small hit is won with a probability of 1/99. The judgment value is set so as to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-6 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/200. While the judgment value is set to, the judgment value is set so that if the game state is a probability change state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/20. If the set value is 3, the determination value is set so that the small hit is not won.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the probability that the big hit or the small hit is won is highest when the set value is "1", and the set value is "3". The judgment value is set so that the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit is the lowest in the case. Further, in the present embodiment, even when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit is highest when the set value is "1", and the set value is "3". The judgment value is set so that the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit is the lowest.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) to 20-6 (C). If any of the hit determination values is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) to 20-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a big hit symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the stop symbol in the small hit symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 20-6 (C) is used, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the determination value corresponding to the small hit. It was not set as, that is, the small hit was not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won. You may do so. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values, 1 to 3, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Only one of the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be made different for each set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

20-7 (A) and 20-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 20-7 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, in FIG. 20-7 (B), the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20-8. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control (probability variation control) and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Is executed and the jackpot B or jackpot C shifts to the high accuracy high base state, and after the end of the jackpot game state, only the time saving control is executed and the variable jackpot A shifts to the low accuracy high base state is set. ..

The jackpot game state by the "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The big hit game state by the "big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-7 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. 0 to 150 are assigned to jackpot A, 151 to 200 are assigned to jackpot B, and 201 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 250 are assigned to the jackpot B. 251 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 275 are assigned to the jackpot B. 276 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-7 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 150 are assigned to jackpot A, 151 to 160 are assigned to jackpot B, and 161 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 170 are assigned to the jackpot B. 171 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 180 are assigned to the jackpot B. 181 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit A" is the same between the case where a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol and the case where a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol. Is set to. Further, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol with the same set value, the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit C" as compared with the case where the big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol. In addition to the high ratio, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit C" when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol is lowered in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio in which the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit A" is the same for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Although an example is shown in which the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) is the same regardless of the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate), the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation continuation rate (probability variation continuation rate) is set for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The rate of consecutive villas) may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be "big hit B" or "big hit C" when the variable display result is a big hit, so that the game is probable after the big hit game is completed. While the control and the time saving control are executed, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the big hit type is determined to be "big hit A", so that only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is completed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is such that when the variation display result is a jackpot, probabilistic control and time reduction control are performed over a predetermined number of variation displays regardless of the jackpot type. It may be executed (so-called number-cutting probability change machine).

However, in such a pachinko gaming machine that cuts the number of times, it is conceivable that the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) will differ by making the jackpot probability different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine. , When the jackpot probability is different for each set value in a pachinko machine that cuts the number of times, the number of probability variation controls and time reduction controls that are executed after the jackpot game ends so that the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) is the same. May be different.

That is, in the set values 1 to 3, the ratio at which both the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are performed after the jackpot game is completed (the ratio at which only the time-saving control is performed) is the first special regardless of the set value. While the jackpot is the same when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the symbol and when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit C" which is a 16-round jackpot. The ratio is highest when the set value is 1 and lowest when the set value is 3 (ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit C": setting 1> setting 2> setting 3). That is, the ratio of the jackpot type determined to be "big hit B", which is a 5-round jackpot, is highest when the set value is 3 and lowest when the set value is 1 (the jackpot type is "big hit B"). Percentage determined to: Setting 3> Setting 2> Setting 1). From the above, regarding the ball ejection rate, the ball ejection rate is the highest when the set value is 1, and the ball ejection rate is the lowest when the set value is 3.

In this embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined jackpot types among jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined by using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the big hit type. When the property (so-called V probability variation type) is set and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In the middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be set in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is passed through the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to the probability change state or the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits, which is used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss, which is used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss", are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 20-9 (A) and 20-9 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) shows the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 20-9 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 0 to 0 in the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997. Up to 300 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 301 to 800 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 20-9 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997. , 0-100 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 101-350 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than that and lowers in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the type of big hit is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, even if the set value is any of "1", "2", and "3", the MR3 Of the range of determination values 0 to 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. With the set values "1", "2", and "3", the fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios.

Further, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss.

As shown in FIG. 20-10 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 20-10 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 20-10 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701. ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of PA2-2) and super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 20-10 (D), in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the MR3 determination value ranges from 0 to 997. 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

In this way, when the loss pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, It is designed to be lower in the order of 3. When the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to D for loss are used, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are the fluctuation patterns of super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation patterns of super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. When each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, when the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

The "common decision rate" in the present embodiment means that the decision rate is completely the same at different set values (the present embodiment), and the decision rate is the same at different set values. (For example, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between the set value 1 to the set value 3).

In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates the embodiment. Not limited to this, if the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. However, only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are both regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which is the same regardless of the set value in which is set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of the super reach α loss is illustrated. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are both regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which is the same regardless of the set value set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is lost, a mode in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

As shown in FIG. 20-10, the fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the fluctuation pattern (PA1). The fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-10 (A) to 20-10 (C), a variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern determination table for loss that differs according to the total number of pending storages. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the hold of the first special symbol is held. When executing the variation display of the number of stored symbols and the second special symbol, the variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach loss (PA2-2) regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be any of 1 to 3. And the range of random numbers assigned to PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss). Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the present embodiment, the ratio in which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention illustrates this. In consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is displayed at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss. It may be executed.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-11, after executing the initialization process (step S8) in the above-mentioned game control main process (see FIG. 3), the CPU 103 It is determined whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa11). When the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa11; Yes), it is determined whether or not the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (step 105SGSa12). When the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (step 105SGSa12; Yes), the setting change process (step 105SGSa13) is executed to proceed to step 105SGSa14.

Then, after executing the setting change process (step 105SGSa13), after executing step S7, when the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF (step 105SGSa11; No), when the door opening sensor 105SG090 is OFF (step 105SGSa12; No). ) Reads the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in step 105SGSa14, sets the read set value as the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then executes the processes after step S10.

FIG. 20-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. In this setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (step S105SGSa21), and displays the specified set value on the display monitor 105SG029 (step S105SGSa22).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is operated (step 105SGSa23). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 105SG052 (step 105SGSa23; No), the process proceeds to step 105SGSa25, and if there is an operation of the setting changeover switch 105SG052 (step 105SGSa23; Yes), the setting value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is displayed. The update is displayed (step S105SGSa24), and the process proceeds to step 105SGSa25. In the process of step S105SGSa24, for example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 105SG029, the display of the display monitor 105SG029 is updated and displayed as "2", and the display monitor 105SG029 is set as the set value. When "2" is displayed, the display of the display monitor 105SG029 is updated to "3", and when "3" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 105SG029, the display of the display monitor 105SG029 is changed to "3". It may be updated and displayed in "1".

In step 105SGSa25, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 is pushed. If there is no pushing operation of the lock switch 105SG051 (step 105SGSa25; No), the process proceeds to step 105SGSa23, and if there is a pushing operation of the lock switch 105SG051 (step 105SGSa25; Yes), the set value displayed on the display monitor 105SG0029 is set. At the same time as specifying (step 105SGSa26), the specified set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated and stored with respect to the already stored set value) (step 105SGSa27). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa28). When the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa28; Yes), the process of step 105SGSa28 is repeatedly executed, and when the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF (step 105SGSa28; No), the setting change process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the fact that both the clear switch (see FIG. 3) and the lock switch 105SG051 are ON (setting change processing). Although the embodiment (execution) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and other processing may be executed depending on the combination of ON / OFF of the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051. For example, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 105SG051 is ON, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where it can be confirmed (the setting confirmation process is executed), and the clear switch is ON. When the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF, the data stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and when both the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051 are OFF, the recovery process from power failure (recovery process shown in FIG. 3). Just execute. During the execution of the above-mentioned setting change processing and setting confirmation processing, the variation display of the special symbol, the launch of the game ball, various lottery such as whether or not the variation display result is a big hit, the payout of the prize ball, etc. It suffices if it is controlled to the game stop state which does not execute any processing of.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 105SG029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-13 (A) and 20-13 (B), when the power is turned off (power is cut off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 ends. If the large winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the lock switch 105SG051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open), and the RAM 102 is backed up on the display monitor 105SG029. The setting value stored in the area is displayed.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (D), the CPU 103 each time it detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 105SG052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ... Every time the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is operated).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (E), the CPU 103 sets the set value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 on the RAM 102 based on the detection of the push operation of the lock switch 105SG051 by the clerk of the amusement park or the like. Store in the backup area (update storage). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 105SG029 to notify the clerk of the amusement park that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-13 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the big winning opening is opened again. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process based on the lock switch 105SG051 being turned off by the operation of the clerk of the game hall, and the game is possible, that is, the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. The decision lottery and the payout of prize balls will be feasible.

In the setting change process in the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 in the setting change process is the most advantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the present embodiment) or the most disadvantageous for the player. The set value (“3” in the present embodiment) may be displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9H, the effect control CPU 120 has the reach effect of super reach A and super reach B as the first suggestion effect and the second effect. It is possible to execute the reach effects of Super Reach C and Super Reach D as suggestive effects, and when executing the reach effects of Super Reach C and Super Reach D, the reach of the Super Reach C and Super Reach D is performed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the production, the notification of the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production can be executed, and the production effect can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the introduction portion of the super reach A and the super reach B, a super reach effect (for example, displaying an enemy character or an enemy) is performed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. By performing an effect that suggests a character), the effect of the effect can be improved and the player can pay attention to the effect.

The present embodiment also includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have a problem that the security property is not improved. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
An opening / closing body that can be opened / closed (for example, a gaming machine frame 105SG003 / glass door frame 105SG003a) and
A setting means (for example, the setting shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 20-12) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052). The part that executes the change process, etc.) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process as shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
Regulatory members that can regulate the operation of the operation unit (for example, curity cover 105SG500A / security cover 105SG500B / security cover 105SG500C) and
With
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulation state in which the operation of the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is open, the regulation state can be released (for example, a gaming machine). When the frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A maintains the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 in a regulated state, while the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened. In this state, the regulated state by the security cover 105SG500A is released, and the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is permitted. FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, 20-. A gaming machine characterized by 14 to 20-17) is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, so that security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
A game control board (for example, a main board 11) on which the game control means is mounted,
A board case (for example, board case 105SG201) for accommodating the game control board and
With
The operation unit is housed in the board case (for example, the setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is inside the board case 105SG201 together with the main board 11. A gaming machine characterized in that it is housed in (FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, etc.) is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, by protecting the setting switching main body by using the board case 105SG201 capable of accommodating the main board 11, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated. , Security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The regulating member is a member that covers the operating portion so that the operation of the operating portion is regulated in the regulated state.
At least a part of the regulating member has transparency (for example, the curity covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C are made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material, and are housed in the substrate case 105SG201 through the security cover. A gaming machine characterized in that the main board 11 and the like can be seen through is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, since the curity covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C can cover a part of the substrate case 105SG201, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts not only on the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 but also on the main substrate 11. Further, since the main board 11 can be confirmed through the curity covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C without releasing the regulation by the curity covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C, whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity. The confirmation work can be easily performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A detection means capable of detecting the opening of the opening / closing body (for example, the door opening sensor 105SG090) is provided.
When the detecting means does not detect the opening of the opening / closing body, the setting means does not set the set value even if the operation unit is operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-11, the game control main process. A gaming machine is described in which the CPU 103 does not execute the setting change process unless the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON in step 105SGSa12), and the security is improved according to this feature.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and a game ball has entered the general winning opening. The part where the prize ball is paid out based on the entry and the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening),
An information display means (for example, the display monitor 105SG029 in the modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means, and
With
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-120, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 105SG029). According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and a game ball has entered the general winning opening. The part where the prize ball is paid out based on the entry and the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening),
An information display means (for example, the display monitor 105SG029 in the modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means, and
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-20, a portion capable of displaying the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 105SG029. ) Is described, and according to this feature, it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value, so that the cost of the gaming machine can be prevented from increasing. Can be done.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process) for determining the variable display pattern in any of a plurality of variable display patterns, and
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process) that executes variable display with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, and
With
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern is to be used at different ratios depending on the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 to 20-10). A game machine characterized in that each fluctuation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is determined at a different ratio based on a set value) is described. Since the player pays attention to the variable display pattern in an attempt to specify the set set value from the determination status of the variable display pattern, the effect of the variable display pattern can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention,
The game control means can control any of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) based on a set value. There,
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value and the second set value, the ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states to control is different (for example). , The part where the ratio of determining which of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C is controlled is different depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2 or 3. ) Is described, and according to this feature, the type of advantageous state controlled according to the set value changes, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
It is provided with a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a start winning process) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
When a new set value is set by the setting means while the holding storage is stored in the holding storage means, the stored holding storage is erased (for example, as shown in the modification 5). A gaming machine characterized by (a part that clears the hold memory based on the setting of a new set value) is described, and according to this feature, the hold memory is straddled before and after the setting change. Since it is not memorized, the setting change can be reflected accurately.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the second invention,
A variable winning means (for example, a large winning opening) that can change into a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win or cannot win than the first state
A control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a process during jackpot opening), and
With
When a new set value is set by the setting means in the first state, the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-13). A game machine characterized in that the grand prize opening is closed by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1 in order to set a new set value for the pachinko game machine 1) is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first state in which the gaming medium can win a prize straddles the change of the set value, and the change of the set value is not accurately reflected.

The present embodiment also includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have a problem that the security property is not improved. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
An opening / closing body that can be opened / closed (for example, a gaming machine frame 105SG003 / glass door frame 105SG003a) and
A setting means (for example, the setting shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 20-12) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052). The part that executes the change process, etc.) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process as shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
Regulatory members that can regulate the operation of the operation unit (for example, curity cover 105SG500A / security cover 105SG500B / security cover 105SG500C) and
With
The restricting member can be switched between a first state that regulates an operation on the operation unit and a second state that does not restrict an operation on the operation unit (for example, the security cover 105SG500B has a covering position with respect to the substrate case 105SG201. And the uncovering position on the right side of the covering position can be slid in the left-right direction./The security cover 105SG500C has a covering position centered on the pivot 105SG500Cd and a uncovering position rotated from the covering position. Can rotate between),
When the restricting member is in the second state when the opening / closing body is open, the opening / closing body cannot be closed unless the regulating member is switched from the second state to the first state (for example). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-15 (B), the security cover 105SG500B must be slid from the uncovered position to the covering position (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is put into the regulated state). (If not changed) The security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 (modification example 1). / Pachinko gaming machine 1 is acceptable. In the state, as shown in FIG. 20-17 (B), the security cover 105SG500C must be rotated from the uncovered position to the covered position (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state). A gaming machine characterized in that the cover 105SG500C comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 (modification example 2)). According to this feature, security can be improved. Specifically, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed in the second state, that is, in the state where the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C are in the uncovered position, so that the security can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A game control board (for example, a main board 11) on which the game control means is mounted,
A board case (for example, board case 105SG201) for accommodating the game control board and
With
The operation unit is housed in the board case (for example, the setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is inside the board case 105SG201 together with the main board 11. A gaming machine characterized in that it is housed in (FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, etc.) is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, by protecting the setting switching main body by using the board case 105SG201 capable of accommodating the main board 11, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated. , Security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The regulating member is a member that covers the operating portion so that the operation of the operating portion is regulated in the regulated state.
At least a part of the regulating member has transparency (for example, the curity covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C are made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material, and are housed in the substrate case 105SG201 through the security cover. A gaming machine characterized in that the main board 11 and the like can be seen through is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, since the curity covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C can cover a part of the substrate case 105SG201, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts not only on the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 but also on the main substrate 11. Further, since the main board 11 can be confirmed through the curity covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C without releasing the regulation by the curity covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C, whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity. The confirmation work can be easily performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
A detection means capable of detecting the opening of the opening / closing body (for example, the door opening sensor 105SG090) is provided.
When the detecting means does not detect the opening of the opening / closing body, the setting means does not set the set value even if the operation unit is operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-11, the game control main process. A gaming machine is described in which the CPU 103 does not execute the setting change process unless the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON in step 105SGSa12), and according to this feature, security can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and a game ball has entered the general winning opening. The part where the prize ball is paid out based on the entry and the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening),
An information display means (for example, the display monitor 105SG029 in the modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means, and
With
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-120, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 105SG029). According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and a game ball has entered the general winning opening. The part where the prize ball is paid out based on the entry and the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening),
An information display means (for example, the display monitor 105SG029 in the modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means, and
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-20, a portion capable of displaying the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 105SG029. ) Is described, and according to this feature, it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value, so that the cost of the gaming machine can be prevented from increasing. Can be done.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process) for determining the variable display pattern in any of a plurality of variable display patterns, and
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process) that executes variable display with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, and
With
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern is to be used at different ratios depending on the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 to 20-10). A game machine characterized in that each fluctuation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is determined at a different ratio based on a set value) is described. Since the player pays attention to the variable display pattern in an attempt to specify the set set value from the determination status of the variable display pattern, the effect of the variable display pattern can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The game control means can control any of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) based on a set value. There,
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value and the second set value, the ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states to control is different (for example). , The part where the ratio of determining which of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C is controlled is different depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2 or 3. ) Is described, and according to this feature, the type of advantageous state controlled according to the set value changes, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
It is provided with a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a start winning process) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
When a new set value is set by the setting means while the holding storage is stored in the holding storage means, the stored holding storage is erased (for example, as shown in the modification 5). A gaming machine characterized by (a part that clears the hold memory based on the setting of a new set value) is described, and according to this feature, the hold memory is straddled before and after the setting change. Since it is not memorized, the setting change can be reflected accurately.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the third invention,
A variable winning means (for example, a large winning opening) that can change into a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win or cannot win than the first state
A control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a process during jackpot opening), and
With
When a new set value is set by the setting means in the first state, the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-13). A game machine characterized in that the grand prize opening is closed by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1 in order to set a new set value for the pachinko game machine 1) is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first state in which the gaming medium can win a prize straddles the change of the set value, and the change of the set value is not accurately reflected.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

(Modification example 1)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the security cover 105SG500A is fixed to the outer frame 105SG001a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 105SG003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (A) and 20-14 (B), a security cover 105SG500B composed of a short piece 105SG500Ba and a long piece 105SG500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 105SG201. The right end of the long piece 105SG500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the coating position covering the right end of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 and the coating release position on the right side of the coating position. Provided so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500B is slid to the right side with respect to the board case 105SG201, and the lock is locked through the through hole 105SG500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 105SG500Bb. The switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be operated. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500B (long piece 105SG500Bb) covers the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 105SG201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state by restricting the slide movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open, the security cover 105SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 105SG201 to release the state of covering the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (A) and 20-14 (B), when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 105SG500B from the board case 105SG201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 105SG500B from the board case 105SG201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 105SG500B with respect to the board case 105SG201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 20-15 (A), when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 105SG500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 105SG201. By sliding the pachinko game machine 1 with respect to the board case 105SG201 until the length reaches L2 (the pachinko game machine 1 is allowed), the pachinko game can be played by operating the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. The set value of the machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-15 (B), the security cover 105SG500B is attached to the board case 105SG201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 105SG201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the lock switch 105SG051 is set by the security cover 105SG500B. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 105SG052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 105SG500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 105SG001a and the gaming machine frame 105SG003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 105SG500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state of covering the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is maintained by the security cover 105SG500B. ..

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 105SG003 side, as shown in FIGS. 20-16 (A) and 20-16 (B) as a modification 2, the left end portion of the security cover 105SG500C is provided on the gaming machine. A coating position covering the right side of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 and rotation from the coating position centered on the pivot axis 105SG500Cd facing in the vertical direction provided on the back side of the frame 105SG003. It may be rotatably pivotally supported from the uncovered position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 105SG500Ca is locked to the locking portion 105SG500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 105SG001a, and the long piece 105SG500Cb is set to switch with the lock switch 105SG051. The rotation of the switch 105SG052 from the back surface side to the back surface side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500C is rotated around the pivot 105SG500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 105SG201 to form the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. It suffices to release the state of being covered with and make it operable. That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the rotation is restricted with the security cover 105SG500C (long piece 105SG500Cb) covering the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open, the security cover 105SG500C is rotated around the pivot 105SG500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 105SG201 to rotate the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), the security cover 105SG500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 105SG500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a clerk or the like operating the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-17 (B), the security cover 105SG500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and locked by the security cover 105SG500C. If the 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 105SG500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a and close the gaming machine frame 105SG003. Is impossible.

Therefore, in the present modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the lock switch 105SG051 is set by the security cover 105SG500C. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 105SG052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification example 3)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 105SG003 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 105SG003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 105SG003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 20-18 (A) to 20-18 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through-hole 105SG003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 so that the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 can be operated via the through-hole 105SG003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are on the side opposite to the mounting surface on the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

When the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 can be operated via the through port 105SG003b, a door body 105SG003c capable of opening and closing the through port 105SG003b is provided, and the door body 105SG003c is closed. The operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 20-18 (B) and 20-18 (C), when the door body 105SG003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 105SG003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 105SG003a. Since the 105SG003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 105SG003a and the gaming machine frame 105SG003 so as to be openable and closable, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are illegally operated when the glass door frame 105SG003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

(Modification example 4)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of executing a game using a gaming ball is disclosed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1, each winning opening The number of game balls entering the (large winning opening, 2nd major winning opening, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, general winning opening) is totaled, and the comparison, role ratio, base, etc. based on the total are calculated. It may be possible to calculate various prize information. When the winning information can be calculated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, as a modified example 4, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the display monitor 105SG029 displays the winning ratio, the winning ratio, and the winning information. The base or the like may be displayable.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-19 (A) and 20-19 (B), the display monitor 105SG029 in the present modification 4 has a first display unit 105SG029105SG0A, a second display unit 105SG029B, and a third display. A unit 105SG029C, a fourth display unit 105SG029D, and a fifth display unit 105SG029E are provided. The first display unit 105SG029A to the fifth display unit 105SG029E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing a character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 105SG029A to the fifth display unit 105SG029E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

On the display monitor 105SG029, each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIGS. 20-19 (B) is displayed. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B of the second digit and the third display unit 105SG029C of the third digit. Then, the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 105SG029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 105SG029E of the fifth digit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the total cumulative combination of display No4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit "B6." Is displayed on the 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

Further, in the present modification 4, the main board 11 (CPU103) controls the display monitor 105SG029 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 20-20 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 20-20 (A), when the display on the display monitor 105SG029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 105SG029D and the 5th display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-4), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 105SG029D and the 5th display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-5), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "L." are displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-6), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E display the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-20 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 105SG029 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

Furthermore, the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed in FIGS. 20-20 (A) and 20-20 (B-1) to 20. As shown in -20 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 105SG030, the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, and base when the set value is "1". 1. Display of base 2, short-term connection ratio when the set value is "2", short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2. When the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 105SG029D and the 5th display unit 105SG029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 105SG029D and the 5th display unit 105SG029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "3".

Then, when the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 105SG029D and the 5th display unit 105SG029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "1".

In the display monitor 105SG029 of the present modification 4, a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor is not limited to this. In 105SG029, only one numerical value or only any two numerical values may be displayed among these ratios, combination ratios, and bases.

Further, in the present modification 4, a mode is illustrated in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 105SG029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Good.

Further, in the present modification 4, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 105SG029, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term connection ratio and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio and the total cumulative combination ratio are displayed in the same color, and the short-term connection ratio is displayed for base 1 and base 2. It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

(Modification 5)

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited thereto. The change of the set value of may be feasible during the game. When changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game, for example, a clerk at the gaming hall first opens the gaming machine frame 105SG003, and then turns on the lock switch 105SG051 to turn on the display monitor 105SG029. After displaying the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the setting changeover switch 105SG052 to change the value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. Then, a clerk of the game hall or the like pushes the lock switch 105SG051 to set the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 as the set value of the new pachinko game machine 1, and also sets the backup area of the RAM 102. You just have to store it. After the new set value is set, the data such as the special figure hold storage and the normal figure hold storage may be deleted. In this way, by clearing the data such as the special figure hold memory and the normal figure hold memory, a new hold memory in which the variable display result becomes a big hit will be newly generated due to the change of the set value, or it will be newly variable. It is possible to prevent the winning ball device 6B from being opened (a hit on a normal figure occurs) and an unreasonably large hit on the variable display result during execution.

(Other disclosure contents)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a gaming machine frame 105SG003 capable of opening and closing the opening of the outer frame 105SG001a and a glass door frame 105SG003a capable of opening and closing the front surface of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is applied as an opening / closing body has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a front door capable of opening and closing the front opening of a housing, such as a slot machine. Further, not only the one that can be opened and closed by rotation, but also the one that can be opened and closed by sliding or attaching / detaching.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are applied as the operation unit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are included. Only one of them may be used, or other operation units having different operation modes (for example, pull operation, push operation, rotation operation, etc.) such as other switches, buttons, levers, dials, and touch sensors may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C are applied as the regulating member is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation unit is formed by such a plate-shaped member. The shape, size, material, and the like can be variously changed as long as the member is not a member to be covered but the operation of the operation portion can be regulated. More specifically, for example, the operation of the operation unit may be regulated by contacting the operation unit instead of covering the operation unit.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C as the regulating member need only be in a state where the operation unit is difficult to operate by covering the operation unit in the regulated state of the operation unit, and the operation is not always possible. It does not have to be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a setting switching main body portion having an operation unit such as a lock switch 105SG051 and a setting switching switch 105SG052 is mounted on the main board 11 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , It may be provided on a substrate separate from the main substrate 11, may be housed in a case other than the board case 105SG201, or may not be housed in the board case 105SG201.

In the first and second modifications, the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C as the regulating members exemplify a mode in which the gaming machine frame 105SG003 cannot be closed in the uncovered position, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. For example, an interlocking mechanism or the like that is interlocked according to the closing operation of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is provided so that the curity covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C return from the coating release position to the coating position. You may.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the substrate case 105SG201 provided with the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is provided at a position where it is difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, a glass door frame is provided at a location other than the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, in the front of the gaming machine frame 105SG003). It may be provided at a position closed by 105SG003a or at an outer frame 105SG001a or the like).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to an image display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and the variable display result is derived according to the variable display result derived to the image display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

(Explanation of feature 112IW)
Next, the feature unit 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 21-1 and 21-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 112IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 112IW003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and the glass. The door frame 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, the setting key 112IW051 for switching to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state described later, and the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. Although the feature unit 112IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), the substrate case 112IW201 is provided with a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the feature unit 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 21-2 and 21-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a includes a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the board case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The curity cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Further, the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 21-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. As a result, the right side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21-3, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating the pieces, the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the pachinko / pachislot machine clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by allowing an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate to enter between the gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko gaming machines 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 1. And the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may cause fraudulent acts such as changing the set value. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A switches the setting with the setting key 112IW051. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the back right side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

In this feature unit 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-4 and 21-5, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), and FIG. 21. In addition to the display result judgment table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C) and the jackpot type judgment table shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) and the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) Includes (not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 21-6, a normal figure display result determination table (not shown), a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing values in the order of 1, 2 and 3 increasing the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3 the advantage increases stepwise. In this feature unit 112IW, the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
21-4 (A) to 21-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In the case of, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. You will win the prize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set values. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" and "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of "2" (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set values. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" and "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 21-4 (A) to 21-4 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 21-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 21-4 (A) to 21-4 (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 21-4, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" is designed to be 1 / 93.75. The probability of winning a small hit at the set value "3" may be set to 1 / 87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine without a small hit, the configuration shown by the feature unit 112IW may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 21-4 (A) to 21-4 (C). A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment can be made depending on whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the case where the advantage is higher in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3" is shown. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this example, as shown in Fig. 21-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is likely to be obtained. In a specific gaming state (high probability / high base state in this example), unlike other gaming states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value "1" may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, when the same probability change is applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (the number of times the probability change ends) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

In the feature unit 112IW, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 21-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-7, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. In order to simplify the above, the percentage of the assigned judgment values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2", When the percentage determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the percentage determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 21-5 (B). In the feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12, the start of the jackpot game state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect as the effect effect to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the post-opening process of the jackpot in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round of opening the jackpot on the effect control board 12 side is completed, the next This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done.

As shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the game is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

The feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during the jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is performed during the fanfare period, interval period, and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot type A <B <C is used. As a result, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 112IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 112IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or when the special figure game is entered into the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and the probability variation control is different for each jackpot type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the ratio of big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence / absence of the time reduction control and the probability variation control, the number of controls, etc.) between the big hit type A to the big hit type C, and the fanfare period and the interval. The average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, but for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, and the number of controls are different for each jackpot type, and the advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured so that the period is different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 112IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot type C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the big hit type. When the property (so-called V probability variation type) is set and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In the middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be set in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is passed through the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to the probability change state or the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table used when is pre-determined and a loss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 21-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and other periods (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use different loss fluctuation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 21-6 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using a real-time clock or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) and 21-6, normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution rate of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), and further, a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) and 21-6 (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss when other than non-reach loss, depending on the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". The ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 112IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratio of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. This is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only normal reach loss has different execution ratios depending on the set value.

The feature unit 112IW displays a common background image in the image display device 5 regardless of which of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) and 21-6 (B) is used. Then, the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image and displays the effect symbol in a variable manner. The dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW, and for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display mode of the effect symbol is different from the usual one and the set value is 1 or 2). (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game during a special period and enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 21-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 21-6 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine the crab.

As shown in FIG. 21-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time is different by changing the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times according to the set value. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. When multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the shaking display of the effect symbol and the time of the high-speed fluctuation display may be different for the effect, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final effect symbol (final) is determined according to the set value. The period during which the stop symbol) is displayed as a stop may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the period during which the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the fluctuation time may be longer when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set higher.

The feature unit 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time, which is shorter than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. Then, this variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the variation time for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number may be different depending on the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this feature unit 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (large winning opening, second major winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform aggregation and calculate various winning information such as a continuous ratio, a winning combination ratio, and a base based on the aggregation.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-8 (A) and 21-8 (B), the display monitor 112IW029 has a first display unit 112IW029A, a second display unit 112IW029B, a third display unit 112IW029C, and a fourth display unit 112IW029A. It includes a display unit 112IW029D and a fifth display unit 112IW029E. The first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

On the display monitor 112IW029, each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 21-8 (B) is displayed. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B of the second digit and the third display unit 112IW029C of the third digit. Then, the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 112IW029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 112IW029E of the fifth digit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E, and the total cumulative ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit "B6." Is displayed on the 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the main board 11 (CPU103) controls the display monitor 112IW029 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 21-9 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 21-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-4), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-5), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "L." are displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-6), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 112IW029 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

Furthermore, the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed in FIGS. 21-9 (A) and 21-9 (B-1) to 21. As shown in -9 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, and base when the set value is "1". 1. Display of base 2, short-term connection ratio when the set value is "2", short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2. If the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

If the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "3".

Then, when the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "1".

In the feature unit 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 of these ratios, combination ratios, and bases.

In addition, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Good.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 112IW029, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term connection ratio and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio and the total cumulative combination ratio are displayed in the same color, and the short-term connection ratio is displayed for base 1 and base 2. It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 21-10 and 21-11 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the effect control means to start the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Set the timer (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation waiting timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the activation of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 112IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 clears, for example, a factory-factory setting flag indicating that the RAM 102 is still set at the factory-shipped (for example, this flag is cleared even if the RAM clearing processes 1 and 2 and the recovery processing described later are executed. (Cleared when the setting change process described later is executed) is set so that it is not set, and in step 112IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory default setting flag is set. do it. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, a value indicating that the factory default value is set (for example, "0" or "-") is set as the set value, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. May be checked to see if is still at the factory default. If the factory default settings are used (step 112 IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; Yes), that is, if the set value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 112 IWS008). In step 112 IWS008, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112 IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; No), that is, if a power failure occurs during the change of the setting value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, in the storage area of the RAM 102, an area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 21-8 and 21-9 is used. It is cleared, and information for performance display such as connection ratio, combination ratio, and base is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (N in step 112IWS011), when the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 112IWS012). In step 112IWS013 N), the process does not shift to step 112IWS014, but shifts to loop processing.

When the processes of steps 112IWS006 to S014 are executed, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 112IW (N in steps 112IWS007 and S008), or the factory default settings remain (step 112IWS007, S008). In the case of 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 open. The RAM is cleared on the condition that the setting value can be changed after step 112IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation process start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112 IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is completed to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. (Step 112IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 processing, of the storage areas of the RAM 102, the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 21-8 and 21-9, and the set value. The area other than the area for storing is cleared, and the information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the information of the set value are not cleared and are retained.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change processing start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). Further, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S9. Therefore, an effect control command instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 21-12 (A) is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processes of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation error process (step 112IWSA04). Then, after that, the process shifts to loop processing. In step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that a setting confirmation error occurs, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process ends.

Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 21-12 (B) is a flowchart showing a setting change process (step 112IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to "2", and "2" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029. The display of the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "3", and when "3" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 112IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the set value already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes the setting change error processing (step 112IWSB07). Then, after that, the process shifts to loop processing. In step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that a setting change error occurs, and the setting change error notification may be executed based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed. In this case, since the setting changing flag is still set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y and 112IWS014 in step 112IWS009). The error state will be cleared.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

FIG. 21-13 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 21-13, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If, the setting change process (step 112IWS005-S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS015-S017) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Will be executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 21-14 (A) and 21-14 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. If the large winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-14 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 21-14 (D), the CPU 103 each time it detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-14 (E), the CPU 103 sets the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like. Store (update storage) in the backup area of. At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 112IW029 to notify the clerk of the amusement park that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 21-14 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory about the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern determination lottery, the prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 112IW) may be displayed.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 21-15 and 21-16 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, check the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage.

If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 112 IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS102 to S104, in the feature unit 112IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 112IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 112IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112 IWS108). As described above, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the process of step 112IWS011, but even after the power is turned on, the step The setting value command is transmitted every time the variation display is started by executing the process of 112IWS108.

Even if the same fluctuation pattern is used, if different fluctuation pattern commands are sent for each set value, the total number of fluctuation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) of fluctuation pattern commands are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, even if the set value command is transmitted only when a specific fluctuation pattern is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern is provided with the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the set value. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of the set value. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 112IWS011) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 112IWS108) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, even if the setting value command for turning on the power and the setting value command for starting fluctuation are configured as separate commands, different setting value commands are sent at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation. Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command is shown at the start of fluctuation, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 side is configured to output which set value. It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. It may be selected by the ratio, or if the set value is 3, the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected or the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not received normally, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not received normally, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 controls to send a probabilistic state background specification command when it is in a probabilistic state, and controls to send a time saving state background specification command when it is in a time saving state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see Fig. 21-4) with the random number value MR1, and if they match, decides to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 performs the small hit determination process (step 112IWS111). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 112IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 112IWS112), and proceeds to step 112IWS116.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 112IWS111), that is, if it is out of the range, the process proceeds to step 112IWS116 as it is.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 21-5) to match the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 112IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS115). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a different special symbol stop symbol depending on the jackpot type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

(Production mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the feature unit 112IW will be described. FIG. 21-17 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main process in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process (step 112IWS201) to change the effect mode when the effect control random number update process of step S77 is executed, and then the effect mode is changed (step 112IWS201). The process returns to step S73.

The feature unit 112IW can control three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the advance notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 112 IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 controls to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect mode may be changed based on the date and time information from the real-time clock and the predetermined date and time. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 112IW201, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and reset the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to B, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to C, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The production mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A → ... It may be changed at random from modes A to C.

(Command analysis processing)

FIG. 21-18 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 112IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 112IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 112IWS303). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 112IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 112IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 112IWS306).

In the feature unit 112IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area supply power to the gaming machine. Is cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, and the process is started with the set value command reception flag cleared. To. Since the effect control board 12 is started in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting confirmation process or the recovery process is executed. It may be configured so that the set value command is always sent when the power is turned on.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change process is performed, but the set value command is normally performed due to missing command or garbled data. If the data cannot be received, the process of step 112IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 112IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so that the process of step 112IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It is executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the setting value command is read out on the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting value command is used. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. If so, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then when a new set value command is received, the newly received set value command is used. If the set value shown does not match the set value stored last time, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that the setting value is abnormal. Then, even if it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been received normally, and the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown by the feature unit 112IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial roll setting)
When the effect control board 12 side receives any of the initialization designation command, the recovery command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting confirmation process end command from the main board 11 in the command analysis process, the feature unit 112IW receives. , The image display device 5 controls to display a predetermined initial result (specifically, a combination of effect symbols displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started). Perform (hereinafter, also referred to as initial roll production).

If the received effect control command is a setting change process end command (step 112IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the set value command is received normally), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, the initial roll determination table is used to combine an even initial roll (for example, "246" or "224"), which is a combination of even-numbered effect symbols, and an odd-numbered effect symbol. It is determined to be one of an odd initial number (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial number which is a combination of a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 112IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 21-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table. In step 112 IWS309, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the set value stored in the set value storage area using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 21-19 (A), and the initial result is performed. Determine the outcome. In the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 21-19 (A), the ratio of odd initial rolls determined increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Therefore, if the odd-numbered initial rolls are displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, the setting value is advantageous as compared with the case where the setting has been changed and the even-numbered initial rolls are displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 21-19 (A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game and to give a motivation to play the game from an early time zone of the business hours of the game store, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112 IWS310). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 21-19 (A) assuming that the set value is "1" (step 112IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

By executing the process of steps 112IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial roll is determined as "1". As shown in FIG. 21-19 (A), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of determining the odd initial roll is the lowest, and the special initial roll is not determined. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 21-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 21-19 (B), in the initial roll determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial roll is determined as compared with the case of the setting value "3" which is the most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and it may not be determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS312 to S313, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the odd initial rolls and special initial rolls are displayed to reduce the situation in which the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial rolls determined in steps 112IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 112IWS314).

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result to be an even initial number, and the image display device 5 In, control is performed to display even initial rolls (step 112IWS315).

By executing the process of step 112IWS315, the feature unit 112IW uniformly displays an even initial result when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial number symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, an initial roll is used by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial roll symbol is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 21-19 (A). It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the even initial number is uniformly displayed when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set, and the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of "???" symbols as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a set value in some form may be displayed as an initial result.

In addition, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 112IWS308, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. May be good.

If the received effect control command is any of the initialization specification command, the recovery command, and the setting confirmation process end command (step 112IWS316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 , The initial roll is determined as the even initial roll, and the image display device 5 controls to display the even initial roll (step 112IWS317). In the feature unit 112IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial roll is determined as the even initial roll and is not determined as the odd initial roll, but the even initial roll is determined by lottery. It may be determined as either an eye or an odd initial result. In this case, the determined ratio may be different depending on the set value.

If the received effect control command is a RAM error notification command (step 112IWS318), the effect control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 112IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "a RAM error error has occurred" in the image display device 5, or outputs a sound indicating a RAM error error or an error sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and LED are emitted with the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED). Is white and emits light).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 112IWS320). For example, if the received effect control command is a variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is stored in the variation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM 122, and the variation pattern command reception flag is set. Further, for example, if the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area provided in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS301.

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the odd initial roll is not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. However, even if the odd initial roll can be displayed. Good. Further, also in this case, the ratio determined by the odd initial number may be different depending on the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd initial roll and the even initial roll, the initial roll that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied and is set. (It is determined that the value is 2 or the set value 3), an initial result that is determined to be a specific set value, or the like may be provided so that the value is displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the specific initial result, and the set value 2 or It will be confirmed that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting a specific initial roll to be determined only in the case of the set value 3, it is confirmed that the set value is 3 when the specific initial roll is displayed. .. Further, at the time of determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the determined ratio may be different depending on the set value.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature unit 112IW, the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial roll effect, and the game (for example, during the game). , The suggestion effect during the game executed during the change display of the effect symbol, the setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern, and the suggestion effect during the big hit executed during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) can be executed. Has been done. In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game, or the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the initial appearance effect suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution ratio. It may be possible to change the setting so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. May be changed.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 21-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 is set with a variable start command reception flag (for example, a variable pattern command reception flag) indicating that a command or the like for designating the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Whether or not it is confirmed (step 112 IWS401).

When the variation start command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the effect waiting demo effect if it is being executed (step 112IWS402, step 112IWS403). Then, the variable start command reception flag is reset (step 112IWS404), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 112IWS405), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

If the fluctuation start command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (N in step 112IWS406). (Step 112 IWS407). In step 112IWS407, for example, when the timer set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ends (for example, set in 30 seconds) times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, when the fluctuation display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when the variable display is not executed and the predetermined period elapses (and the jackpot game state is not controlled), or when the game is not started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo effect is produced by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the timing result by the timing means matches a predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 112IWS408). That is, in step 112IWS408, it is confirmed whether or not the game has started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112 IWS409). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the mode of the effect when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed (step 112IWS410). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demo effect is controlled and includes the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the including aspect is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

FIG. 21-21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 112 IWS410, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-21 (A), a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area. Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the mode of the effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-21 (A), determination values are assigned so that the ratio of pre-game suggestion effects executed increases in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Has been done. Further, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" in which the second effect mode is determined increases. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the pre-game suggestion effect is set to an advantageous set value by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 21-21 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the set value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112 IWS411). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value is "1", and whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-21 (A). And the production mode is determined (step 112 IWS412). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS411 to S412, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIG. 21-21 (A), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode may not be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112 IWS413). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS414). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

FIG. 21-21 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 21-21 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case of the set values "2" and "3". The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS413 to S414, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 112IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 112IWS410, S421, and S414 (step 112IWS415). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 112IWS416 as it is. That is, in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 112IWS413, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and is in the effect mode B. It is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed even though the disadvantageous setting value is set and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being less interested in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-21 (A), before the game is used. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 21-21 (A), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed so that the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. You may do it.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

Note that the feature unit 112IW is configured so that the pre-game suggestion effect is not executed when the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not yet been received. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed even when the setting has not been changed. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at different ratios depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 21-21 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-21 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-21 (C), when the command at the time of recovery is received, that is, the setting change is made. When it is not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is also smaller. By doing so, it is possible to make the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect different depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 112IWS416). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 112 IWS416 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, the execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or jackpot suggestion effect), the execution content (execution mode), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, the customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions and the execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. The information may be stored, and the effect of estimating the set value from the information and notifying the setting value may be executed. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation degree (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 112IWS408 to 112IWS415. Further, the process of step 112IWS416 shows the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting demo effect, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game and to give a motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and it is possible to enhance the interest. .. Not limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW, for example, a real-time clock or the like is used so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). May be good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include the information regarding the suggestion effect during the game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. Further, when the player takes a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of granting a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the player may access the Web server (or analyze the two-dimensional code) using the mobile terminal to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may use the mobile terminal to read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information so that the setting suggestion image suggesting the set value is displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

(Suggestion production decision processing during the game)
FIG. 21-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect determination process during the game. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the special period (Y in step 112IWS501), it selects the first in-game suggestion effect determination table (step 112IWS502) and is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 112IWS501), the suggestion effect determination table during the second game is selected (step 112IWS503). For example, when a setting change end command or a setting value command is received, a special period flag is set, and when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 112IWS501 whether or not the special period is in progress.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS504). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 112IWS505).

FIG. 21-23 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 21-23 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and 21-23 (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

Further, regarding the second production mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first production mode (appearance of mini character A). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in execution ratio between the set values is larger than that. That is, there is a high degree of reliability that the second effect mode is set to a set value that is more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and 21-23 (B), the highly reliable second in-game suggestion effect is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and 21-23 (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the game according to the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112 IWS506). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". Step 112 IWS507).

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS506 to S507, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and 21-23 (B), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of determining that the suggestion effect is executed during the game is low, and the ratio determined as the second effect mode is low. Is the lowest and may not be determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS508). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS509).

FIG. 21-23 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 21-23 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value "3". , It may not be determined as the third production mode.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS508 to S509, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 112IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect is not executed during the game.

By executing the process of step 112IWS508, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode is B. It is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect is executed during the game and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game may be enabled to be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and 21-23 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 21-23 (A) and 21-23 (B), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In this feature unit 112IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect during the game at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the suggestion effect during the game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. , It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a different mode. For example, the size, color, and the like of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, the feature unit 112IW is configured so that whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, the type of pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are big hits. Depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game, the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed may be different.

For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be executed only when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B and the fluctuation pattern including the super reach A having a higher expectation than the super reach B, the latter is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. Or, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestion effect is executed is high. It may be made higher.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the pseudo-ream effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-ream effect (or the number of pseudo-reams is smaller than that of the former), the former has a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game. It may be set to be high, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, or the ratio when the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high and when it is executed. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game, or the game. The reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high, or the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed may be high, and the reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high. ..

(During big hit production decision processing)
FIG. 21-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during the big hit. The big hit middle effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit middle effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS601). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit, and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 112IWS602). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

In step S112IWS602, when the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the number shown in FIG. 21-25 (A). The 1 jackpot suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during the specific period, the second jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-25 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous consecutive villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as a specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st variation after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a jackpot suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different depending on the period from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

In the first and second jackpot suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-25 (A) and 21-25, the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between the set values is high between the specific period and the non-specific period. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between them becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the suggestion effect during the jackpot, which is more reliable than in the non-specific period, is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a specific period, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the jackpot suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-25 (A) and 21-25 (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (A1), the effect symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 112IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (A1), after the effect symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, the figure is shown. As shown in 21-27 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 112IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112IWS603). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1" (the effect mode A). Step 112 IWS 604). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS603 to S604, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 21-25 (A) and 21-25 (B), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, the player is disappointed by the big hit suggestion effect being executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is played and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS605). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS606). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

FIG. 21-25 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 21-25 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining that the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed is low, and the set values are “2” and “3”. Compared with the above, the ratio of the second effect mode and the third effect mode is determined to be lower, and the fourth effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS605 to S606, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player, and to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 112IWS607 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 112IWS605, in the case where the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the big hit. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 21-25 (A) and 21-25 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 21-25 (A) and 21-25 (B), only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 21-25 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 21-25 (B), the ratio of not executing the suggestion effect during the big hit is the same regardless of the set value, but if the ratio of not being executed differs depending on the set value. You may let it.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a big hit middle suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect reaches the predetermined number of times, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

In this feature unit 112IW, it is possible to execute the jackpot suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the jackpot suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including the effect mode and the fourth effect mode) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different depending on the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 112IWS607).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 112IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (B2), the movable member 112IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 21-26 (A1) and 21-26 (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 112IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5. The position where the dialogue image is displayed becomes difficult to see. In the feature unit 112IW, since the suggestion effect during the jackpot and the accessory effect are executed at different timings of the fanfare period in the jackpot game, the movable member 112IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is the jackpot. It does not obscure the dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 112IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player may pay attention to the movable member 112IW101 and overlook the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect. Therefore, in step 112IWS607, by using the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-25 (D), the accessory effect is not executed when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and degrading the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (Performed during the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the big hit suggestion effect, the operation mode of the movable member 112IW101 is changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialogue image by the big hit suggestion effect), or the big hit. The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is decided, the execution of the character effect may be restricted by lowering the execution rate of the character effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 21-25 (D), when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the accessory effect (N in step 112IWS608), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 112IWS609).

Here, a light guide plate 112IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end face of the light guide plate are provided on the front surface of the image display device 5, and the light guide plate 112IW103 is provided. It is assumed that the light emitting body is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 112IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 112IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine. Then, by making the light emitting body emit light, it is possible to execute the light guide plate effect of emitting light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, resulting in a “big hit”. Appears. Further, during the execution of the light guide plate effect, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

In step 112IWS609, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 21-25 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when it is executed. To. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed is low. That is, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous set value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to see. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-26 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 112IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. If this is done, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest of the game due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is not desirable for the player. When the big hit suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion production during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

In the feature unit 112IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the jackpot suggestion effect (or pre-game suggestion effect or in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, the occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. Further, when a predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect having a specific effect mode) that can be executed at the same time as the jackpot suggestion effect is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect. You may give priority to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect, it is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. The image may be displayed preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the effect symbol is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the effect symbol arranged on the surface. It may be applied (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum type gaming machine). Alternatively, the effect symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having the effect symbol arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation (or characteristic) different from the normal operation at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting is changed. Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the rate of execution may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Further, in this case as well, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesired suggestion is given to the player. For example, when an even initial number is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of executing the even-numbered effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect of displaying characters and pictures by the light guide plate. Further, the effect is not limited to the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, and includes a control to output a predetermined sound, a control to vibrate the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control to emit a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to others to reduce (or make it difficult to notice) the visibility of the initial roll effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect.

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 112IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at the time of turning on the power or the real-time clock) is executed in a specific mode. May suggest the setting.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold memory becoming 0 and the number of times when a start winning prize exceeding the upper limit hold memory number occurs. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the predetermined operation valid period, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting (for example, the display control of the predetermined image, the output control of the predetermined sound, the predetermined sound). (Controlling the light emission of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the feature portion 112IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification example 1)
For example, the feature portion 112IW illustrates a form in which the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 112IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 21-28 (A) and 21-28 (B), a security cover 112IW500B composed of a short piece 112IW500Ba and a long piece 112IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 112IW201. The right end of the long piece 112IW500Bb slides left and right between the covering position covering the right side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and the uncovering position on the right side of the covering position. Provided so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 112IW201, and is set via the through hole 112IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 112IW500Bb. The key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500B (long piece 112IW500Bb) covers the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 112IW201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state by restricting the slide movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 112IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-28 (A) and 21-28 (B), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 112IW500B with respect to the board case 112IW201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 21-29 (A), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 112IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 112IW201. By sliding the board case 112IW201 until it reaches the length L2 (making the pachinko game machine 1 an allowable state), a pachinko game clerk or the like operates the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052. The set value of the machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 21-29 (B), the security cover 112IW500B is attached to the board case 112IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 112IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 112IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 112IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 is set by the security cover 112IW500B. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 112IW001a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 112IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state of covering the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is maintained by the security cover 112IW500B. ..

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 21-30 (A) and 21-30 (B) as a modification 2, the left end portion of the security cover 112IW500C is provided on the gaming machine. Centered on the vertical axis 112IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 112IW003, the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and the covering position rotated from the covering position. It may be rotatably pivotally supported from the uncovered position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 112IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 112IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 112IW001a, and the long piece 112IW500Cb is set and switched to the setting key 112IW051. The rotation of the switch 112IW052 from the back surface side to the back surface side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201 to form the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. It suffices to release the state of being covered with and make it operable. That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the rotation is restricted with the security cover 112IW500C (long piece 112IW500Cb) covering the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201 to press the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-31 (A), the security cover 112IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a clerk or the like operating the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 21-31 (B), the security cover 112IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 112IW500C. If the 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 112IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 112IW001a and close the gaming machine frame 112IW003. Is impossible.

Therefore, in the present modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 is set by the security cover 112IW500C. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification example 3)
Further, in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 112IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 112IW003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 21-32 (A) to 21-32 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through-hole 112IW003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 112IW003 so that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated via the through-hole 112IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are on the side opposite to the mounting surface on the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

When the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated via the through port 112IW003b, a door body 112IW003c capable of opening and closing the through port 112IW003b is provided, and the door body 112IW003c is closed. The operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 21-32 (B) and 21-32 (C), when the door body 112IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 112IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 112IW003a. Since the 112IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 112IW003a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003 so as to be openable and closable, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are illegally operated when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

As described above, the feature unit 112IW includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. Based on the value, it is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As a device, a gaming machine characterized in that the suggested effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a portion that executes steps 112IWS421, S507, S604) is described, and according to this feature, In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS011 and S108. According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 112 IWS410, S421, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 112 IWS410, S505, S602 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 112IWS421, S507, and S604 based on the set value "1")
It is described that the data capacity may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in the data capacity can be prevented.

In the feature unit 112IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is started from an early time zone. It can give motivation to play and enhance the interest of playing games.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 21-6 (A), (B), 21-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 21-25 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the first invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it is possible to further provide an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to handle, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) may be different depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 21-5). It is described that, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the first invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display may be different depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 21-7), and such a configuration Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the first invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is regulated by the regulating member, and the regulated state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In the state where the security cover 112IW500A is used, the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is regulated by the security cover 112IW500A, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open. Is released from the regulated state by the security cover 112IW500A, and is in a permissible state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 21-2, 21-3, 21-28 to 21-. 31) It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. Based on the value, it is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to N, S508 in step 112IWS413. A gaming machine characterized in that (when N in N and S605 is N, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed) is described. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS011 and S108. According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is started from an early time zone. It can give motivation to play and enhance the interest of playing games.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 21-6 (A), (B), 21-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 21-25 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it is possible to further provide an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to handle, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) may be different depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 21-5). It is described that, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the second invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display may be different depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 21-7), and such a configuration Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the second invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is regulated by the regulating member, and the regulated state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In the state where the security cover 112IW500A is used, the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is regulated by the security cover 112IW500A, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open. Is released from the regulated state by the security cover 112IW500A, and is in a permissible state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 21-2, 21-3, 21-28 to 21-. 31) It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. Based on the value, it is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention that solves the problem.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect execution means
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). Pre-suggestion production, in-game suggestion production, big hit suggestion production) can be executed.
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 112IWS414, S509, and S606, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode). A gaming machine to be played is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in a game in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set set value.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS011 and S108. According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 112 IWS410, S421, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 112 IWS410, S505, S602 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the dedicated decision data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table in step 112IWS414. , S509, S606 may be executed), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is started from an early time zone. It can give motivation to play and enhance the interest of playing games.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is also possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 21-6 (A), (B), 21-23 (A), (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 21-25 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it is possible to further provide an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to handle, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) may be different depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 21-5). It is described that, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the third invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display may be different depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 21-7), and such a configuration Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the third invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is regulated by the regulating member, and the regulated state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In the state where the security cover 112IW500A is used, the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is regulated by the security cover 112IW500A, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open. Is released from the regulated state by the security cover 112IW500A, and is in a permissible state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 21-2, 21-3, 21-28 to 21-. 31) It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the effect mode A is controlled, if the set value information is not input normally, It is configured so that the suggestion effect can be executed as if it is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player (the configuration of the first invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode B, the set value. When the information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the configuration of the second invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is input normally. If this is not the case, the case where the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is executably configured as the suggestive effect (the configuration of the third invention described above) is shown. Not limited. For example, it is possible to switch which of the above-mentioned first invention to third invention control method is used to execute the suggestion effect according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, when the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as if the set value is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player. The configuration (the configuration of the above-mentioned first invention) is configured so that if the gaming state is a time-saving state and the set value information is not input normally, the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted (the above-mentioned second invention). (Structure) If the game state is a probabilistic state, if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (configuration). The configuration of the third invention described above) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to make the suggestion effect executable by all the control methods of the first to third inventions shown above, and the suggestive effect is made executable by using only one of the control methods. May be good.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as omission or garbled data, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above (suggestion). Although the case (restricting the production) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestion effect may be restricted. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. If the set value indicated by the set value command received in is not the same as the set value stored last time, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above. It may be controlled (restricting the suggestion effect).

Further, the method of differentiating the games in each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of odd-numbered setting values such as the set values "1" and "3", consecutive villas (that big hits occur continuously during a probable change state) are likely to occur and consecutive villas occur. It is configured so that there is a large difference from when it is difficult, and in the case of an even-numbered setting value such as the setting value "2", the likelihood of occurrence of consecutive villas is relatively constant and does not change, and the setting value A suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be feasible. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above. It may be configured to do (restrict the suggestion effect).

The feature portion 112IW also includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. A game machine that is characterized by being able to execute (such as or initial roll production) is described. According to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing pachinko.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of variable display of production identification information (for example, production design).
In the suggestion effect executing means, different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value in the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display (for example, the suggestion effect (for example). It is stated that the odd-numbered initial roll display) may be made feasible, and according to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 21). As shown in -21 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table having different judgment values may be used), and according to such a configuration, the game interest can be enjoyed. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value after the variable display is started.
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the suggested set value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have a problem that they cannot effectively give motivation to play a game and cannot sufficiently enhance their interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is characterized in that the suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 21-6 (A), (B), 21-23 (A), (B)). A game machine to be played is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period of time, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIGS. 21-6 (A), (Fig. 21-6 (A),). B)),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to this structure, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 21-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). It is possible to execute the suggestion effect based on (for example, that the advance notice effect has been executed) (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed). It is described that (A) and (B) may be referred to), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestive effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-23 (A), (B), etc.).
A gaming machine is described that further includes a notification means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect. According to this feature. , You can check the suggestive effects that have been performed in the past, and you can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
It is described that the notification means may be capable of notifying the number of times the suggestion effect is executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416). It is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
It is described that the notification means may be capable of notifying the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416). According to such a configuration, It is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
It is described that the notification means may be able to notify information about the executed suggestion effect while waiting for a customer for which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
An information generation means for generating information (for example, execution history information) related to the executed suggestion effect, and
An image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) in which the information can be read by an imaging device, and an image generation means.
It is described that the specific image may be provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image pickup device. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize due to other effects, the interest may be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, it is further provided with a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. FIG. 21-25. A gaming machine characterized by (see (D)) is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
When the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap, the limiting means changes at least one of the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending). It is stated that it may be changed to be executed during the period), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited. See FIG. 21-25 (D). ) It is stated that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 112IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the usual one (for example, suggestion during a big hit). It is described that it may be controlled so that it does not stop at a position where it overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the production)), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
Both the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include a display in one display means (for example, the image display device 5).
It is described that the above-mentioned one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect with priority over the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the interest. it can.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902 have a problem that the execution of the setting suggestion effect, which is not preferable for the player, may reduce the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set setting value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 21-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. A game machine is described in which it is further provided with a difficult-to-use character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.), and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, an accessory effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 112IW101). The effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A light guide plate having translucency capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 112IW103) and
It is provided with a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end surface of the light guide plate.
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) that emits light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. It is also described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes the first setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. See FIGS. 21-25 (A) and 21-25)) that suggests that the setting is set to the first set value. , A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value, which is more advantageous to the player than the first set value, is set (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect of the third effect mode. FIG. 21-25 (Fig. 21-25). A), (see (B)) can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIG. 21-25 (E)). However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eighth invention,
It is provided with setting suggestion setting means capable of setting the execution ratio of setting suggestion (for example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the operating means such as the push button 31B and the operating means (management) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. It is described that the setting related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed by operating (operable only by a person), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. ..

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that displays variable identification information.
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed.
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a jackpot game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value (see, for example, FIG. 21-5). A game machine to be played is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
It is stated that the fanfare control period in the advantageous state may be different depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 21-5 (B)). It is possible to prevent the sex from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the interval control period in the advantageous state may be different depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 21-5 (B)). It is possible to prevent the sex from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the ending control period in the advantageous state may be different depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 21-5 (B)). It is possible to prevent the sex from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
The setting means is such that the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value-adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 21-5 (A) and 21-5 (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) suggesting a set set value may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the ninth invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means enables a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) to be executed regardless of a set value in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. It is described that such a configuration may enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the ninth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can control any of the plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value.
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be different depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 21-5 (B)), and according to such a configuration, It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
A gaming machine is described in which a predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to a variable display differs depending on a set value (for example, see FIG. 21-7). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
It is stated that the variable display period may be different depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 21-7), and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
It is stated that the display result of the variable display may be displayed differently depending on the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
The setting means is such that the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value-adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display may be longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 21-7). It is described that, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be predetermined according to the set value, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means may determine one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIG. 21-7). It is described that, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display the set set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the portion capable of displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029). It is described that it is good, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 112IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other feature units such as the feature unit 31AK to configure the gaming machine. For example, when the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect shown by the feature unit 112IW are executed, a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect. Occasionally, the title corresponding to the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect may be notified in the same manner as the feature unit 31AK.

(Explanation of feature units 261F to 263F)
Next, the feature portions 261F to 263F of the present embodiment will be described. In the feature units 261F to 263F, a control for executing a specific effect based on motion detection by a detection means capable of detecting a player's motion (operation) such as a push button 31B, a push sensor 35B, or the like will be described. The feature portion 261F will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-1 to 22-8 and the like. The feature portion 262F will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-9 and the like. The feature portion 263F will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-10 to 22-12 and the like.

The configurations described in the following feature units 261F to 263F may or may not be applied to the configurations in which the setting confirmation processing and the setting change processing such as the jackpot probability described above can be executed. Further, the effects described in the following feature units 261F to 263F may be used as an effect that can suggest a set value such as a big hit probability in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine in which the setting of the big hit probability or the like can be changed. For example, depending on the type of the setting value of the jackpot probability currently set, a part of the production modes of the various effects shown below may be different, so that the setting value of the jackpot probability or the like can be suggested.

[Explanation of feature section 261F]
The feature unit 261F will be described. In the effect control CPU 120, a meter effect that changes the display mode of the meter display shown in the image according to the detection of continuous operation of the push button 31B (hereinafter referred to as continuous striking) as a continuous operation by the player's own power. In addition, it is determined that the push button 31B is repeatedly hit at predetermined intervals based on the detection of a predetermined movement of the player different from the repeated hits, such as a long press operation of the push button 31B. A meter effect that changes the display mode of the meter display is executed according to the fact that the meter display is performed.

In the meter effect, various effect controls as described below are executed. FIG. 22-1 is a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing an example of the meter effect. When the variation display in the variation pattern of the special reach (for example, the third super reach and the fourth super reach described later) which is predetermined as a specific variation pattern is executed, FIGS. 22-1 (A) to (D) The meter effect as shown in is executed.

As shown in FIG. 22-1 (A), at the start of the special reach, the image display device 5 variably displays the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols are displayed by moving from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the corners of the display area. These decorative symbols form a reach symbol in which the "left" and "right" decorative symbols stop at the same symbol and the "middle" symbol is variably displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 22-1 (A) to 22-1 (D), the meter image 261F001 is displayed on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5. The meter image 261F001 is an image having a plurality of stages of scales (11 scales) in the vertical direction and displaying a so-called meter value. The scale of the meter image 261F001 has a configuration in which one special stage "MAX scale" is provided on the stage of ten "normal scales". In the meter image 261F001, the scale is partially the first color (blank portion in the figure) in response to the detection of the operation of the push button 120 by the player within the operation valid period in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid. ) To the second color (the shaded area of the design), the meter value is displayed in the second color. The meter value changes (increases) from the bottom to the top as shown by the broken line arrow in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 22-1 (A) to 22-1 (D), a predetermined character image 261F005 is displayed on the right side of the meter image 261F001 (the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5). Below the character image 261F005, a button image 261F002 composed of an image imitating the push button 31B and a character image of "continuous hitting!" Is displayed. By displaying the button image 261F002, the operation of the player who operates (continuously hits) the push button 31B is promoted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 22-1 (A) to 22 (D), an operation valid period image 261F004 showing an operation valid period of the push button 31B is displayed below the button image 261F002 by a bar graph type meter display in a horizontal bar mode. To. In the operation valid period image 261F004, the operation valid period is indicated by a horizontal meter value (black portion in the figure) that is reduced and displayed in the direction of the broken line arrow in the figure.

When it is decided to shift to the first development production for the special reach production, after the start of the special reach production, as shown in FIG. 22-1 (B), the game within the operation valid period. When the meter display of the meter image 261F001 reaches the stage of level L5 by the self-sufficient continuous striking or the automatic continuous striking of the push button 31B by the operation of the person, the process shifts to the first development effect.

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the second development production for the special reach production, after the start of the special reach production, as shown in FIG. 22-1 (C), within the operation valid period. When the meter display of the meter image 261F001 reaches the stage of level L10 by the self-sufficient continuous hitting or the automatic continuous hitting of the push button 31B by the operation of the player, the process shifts to the second development effect.

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the special development production for the special reach production, after the start of the special reach production, as shown in FIG. 22-1 (D), within the operation valid period. When the meter display of the meter image 261F001 reaches the level MAX of the special stage by the self-sufficient continuous hitting or the automatic continuous hitting of the push button 31B by the operation of the player, the process shifts to the special development effect.

Next, the relationship between the detection determination and the change in the meter display of the meter image 261F001 will be described for each of the self-powered continuous striking and the automatic continuous striking.

FIG. 22-2 is a timing chart showing the detection determination and the meter display change in each of the self-powered continuous hitting and the automatic continuous hitting. In FIG. 22-2, (A) shows a timing chart of self-continuous striking, and (B) shows a timing chart of auto-continuous striking.

In FIGS. 22-2 (A) and 22-2, (a) the player's motion detection is turned on / off, (b) the judgment of self-repeated hitting or automatic continuous hitting is turned on / off, and (c) the meter at the time of determining the loss. The display level and (d) the meter display level at the time of determining the jackpot are shown.

First, the self-powered continuous striking will be described with reference to FIG. 22-2 (A). Within the operation valid period, it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 has repeatedly hit the push button 31B each time a short-press operation of the push button 31B is detected, as in (a) and (b). Each time the self-powered repeated hits are detected and determined, the display level (the number of displays of the second color) of the meter value of the meter image 261F001 increases by one step as shown in (c) and (d). It is done.

When the special development effect is not selected and it is decided not to shift to the special development effect, the meter value reaches the maximum level Ll0 as shown in (c) when the detection and determination of self-repeated hits are made within the operation valid period. Control is performed to limit the increase in the meter value so that it is possible but not reachable up to the level MAX.

When the special development effect is selected, which is decided to shift to the special development effect, the meter value can reach the maximum level Ll0 as shown in (d) if the self-powered continuous hit is detected and judged within the operation valid period. After that, the meter value is automatically controlled to exceed the level L10 and reach the level MAX regardless of the continuous striking.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the self-powered continuous striking is executed, the meter display of the meter image 261F001 can reach the stage of the maximum level L10 according to the detection of the self-powered continuous striking. Then, when it is decided not to shift to the special development effect, the change of the meter display due to the self-pressing is stopped at the maximum level L10, and when it is decided to shift to the special development effect, the meter display is automatically displayed. Control is executed to reach level MAX beyond level L10.

Next, the automatic continuous striking will be described with reference to FIG. 22-2 (B). If a long press operation of the push button 31B for a specific period (for example, 1 second) or longer is detected within the operation valid period, as in (e) and (f), it is considered that repeated hits have been executed at predetermined time intervals. A continuous hit judgment is made.

When it is determined that the automatic continuous hitting is performed by the automatic continuous hitting judgment, it is determined that the continuous hitting is executed at predetermined time intervals as in (f), and each time the judgment is made, as in (g) and (h). In addition, the display level (the number of displays of the second color) of the meter value of the meter image 261F001 is displayed so as to increase step by step. The predetermined time interval in which it is determined that the continuous hits have been executed by the automatic continuous hits is longer than the time interval in which it is determined that the self-powered continuous hits have been executed. As a result, the rate of change of the meter value display level in response to the automatic continuous striking is controlled to be slower than the rate of change of the meter value display level in response to the self-repeated continuous striking.

When the special development effect is not selected and it is decided not to shift to the special development effect, the meter value reaches the maximum level L5 as shown in (g) when the automatic repeated hits are detected and judged within the operation valid period. Control is performed to limit the increase in the meter value so that it is possible but not reachable up to the level MAX.

When the special development effect is selected, which is decided to shift to the special development effect, the meter value can reach the maximum level L5 as shown in (h) if the automatic continuous hitting is detected and judged within the operation valid period. After that, the meter value is automatically controlled to exceed the level L5 and reach the level MAX regardless of the automatic repeated hits.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the automatic continuous striking is executed, the meter display of the meter image 261F001 can reach the stage of the maximum level L5 according to the detection of the self-repeated continuous striking. Then, when it is decided not to shift to the special development effect, the change of the meter display due to the automatic repeated hits stops at the maximum level L5, and when it is decided to shift to the special development effect, the meter display automatically stops. Control is executed to reach level MAX beyond level L5.

In this way, when the time when the self-repeated hit is executed and the time when the auto-repeated hit is executed are compared, the self-repeated hit is detected and determined at a time interval shorter than the determination time interval of the automatic continuous hit. Then, when a meter effect in which the meter value cannot reach the level MAX is executed, the maximum changeable meter value by self-continuous striking is level L10, and the maximum changeable meter value by automatic continuous striking is the level. It is L5. When the meter effect that the meter value can reach the level MAX is executed, the meter value that can be changed to the maximum by self-striking is level L10, and the meter value that can be changed to the maximum by auto-striking is level L5. After that, at a predetermined timing, it is displayed that the meter value automatically reaches from the current level to the level MAX for each of the self-sufficient continuous striking and the automatic continuous striking, regardless of the operation.

The following effects can be obtained by the effect control shown in FIGS. 22-1 and 22-2.
(1) A meter effect when executing a meter effect as a specific effect based on the detection and determination of self-repeated hits, and when executing a meter effect based on the detection and determination of automatic repeated hits. Compared to the level L5, which is the meter value at which the effect mode of the meter effect can be changed to the maximum, the specific stage of the meter value at which the effect mode of the meter effect can be changed to the maximum is set as high as the level L10, so that the player can repeatedly hit by himself / herself. You can make the player feel the significance.

(2) Within the effective operation period, when the effect mode of the meter effect reaches the predetermined stage level L5, it becomes possible to shift to the first development effect, and the effect mode of the meter effect reaches the level L10 which is a specific stage. In some cases, the second development production can be transferred. As a result, the player can continue by himself / herself because the type of the effect mode to which the meter effect is developed differs depending on whether the effect mode of the meter effect reaches a predetermined stage or a specific stage. It is possible to promote the operation.

(3) When it is decided not to shift to the special development effect in the meter effect, the level MAX, which is a special stage of the meter effect, is a stage of the effect mode that cannot be reached when the self-powered continuous hit is executed. As a result, when it is decided not to shift to the special development production, even if the player hits himself at too high a speed, he cannot reach the level MAX on the pachinko machine 1 side. It is possible to determine the stage of the effect mode that can be reached with.

(4) Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when it is decided to shift to the special development effect when the variable display is determined to be the jackpot display result, etc., it is determined to be an automatic continuous hit. Then, within the operation valid period, the meter value is controlled so as to exceed the level L5 and reach MAX as shown in (h), so that the interest of the player who repeatedly hits the auto is lowered. Can be prevented.

Next, the fluctuation patterns used in the feature units 261F to 263F will be described. FIG. 22-3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern in a tabular format. The variation pattern described below is specified by a variation pattern command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display is executed.

In FIG. 22-3, (a) shows a table for determining when the normal state is out, and FIG. 22-3 shows the table for determining when the time saving state is out. Further, (c) shows a normal jackpot determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation jackpot determination table. Each of the determination tables of FIGS. 22-3 (a) to 22-3 (a) to (d) is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used for determining (determining) the variation pattern type and the variation pattern.

The “normal reach” in each table of FIG. 22-3 shows a fluctuation pattern of the normal reach that does not perform a particularly flashy effect when the reach state is reached. "Super reach" indicates a variation pattern in which a reach effect is performed to display a special effect image when the reach state is reached. Further, "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern in which the ratio of selection when a big hit is obtained is higher than that of "normal reach", and the reliability of the big hit is high. "Super reach" is a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than "normal reach". Four types of fluctuation patterns are set for Super Reach, and the degree of expectation of a big hit (possibility of becoming a big hit) is such that 1st Super Reach <2nd Super Reach <3rd Super Reach <4th Super Reach. ) Is high.

The "expectation degree" is a concept including the expectation degree for a big hit, the expectation degree for a probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big hit (also referred to as reliability) is the degree of expectation (the ratio of a big hit) that becomes a big hit when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, the reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the jackpot is 60 times, the expectation for the jackpot is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) at which the jackpot appears is 60%). Further, the degree of expectation for the probability change means the degree of expectation (ratio of probability change) to shift to the probability change state.

Next, the development effect selection table used for selecting and deciding whether or not to shift to the special development effect in the meter effect at the time of determining the big hit will be described. FIG. 22-4 is a diagram showing the special development effect selection table in tabular form. The special development effect selection table is stored in ROM 121.

The special development effect selection table includes the special development effect selection table at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-4 (A) and the special development effect selection table at the time of the fourth special reach in FIG. 22-4 (B). ing. The special development effect selection table at the time of the third special reach is used when executing the third super reach. The special development effect selection table at the time of the fourth special reach is used when executing the fourth super reach.

In the special development effect selection table of FIGS. 22-4 (A) and 22-4 (B), the random number SR2 (numerical range of 0 to 99) for determining the special development effect selection as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control CPU 120. A total of 100 numerical values are allocated to the decision that the special development effect can be selected and the decision that another development effect cannot be selected. For SR2, the number of allocated random number SR2 values is shown for the sake of clarity.

In the special development effect selection table at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-4 (A), the special development effect is set so that the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing has a magnitude relationship of "selectable <non-selectable". The data is set so that the ratio of non-selectable is higher. On the other hand, in the fourth special development effect selection table at the time of special reach in FIG. 22-4 (B), the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing has a special magnitude relationship of "selectable> non-selectable". The data is set so that the ratio that allows the development effect to be selected is higher.

As a result, the 4th Super Reach, which has a high expectation of becoming a big hit, is more likely to be selected to execute the special development effect than the 3rd Super Reach. Therefore, when the special development effect is executed, a big hit occurs. It is possible to raise the player's expectation about. Also, when the special development effect is not executed because the execution of the special development effect may be selected both when the decision to make a big hit is made and when the decision to make a disappointment is made. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and deteriorating the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the selection decision as to whether or not the special development effect can be selected may be executed only when a big hit occurs. At that time, it is confirmed that the jackpot display result will be obtained when the special development effect is executed, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the development effect pattern selection table used for selecting and determining the effect pattern of the development effect of the meter effect will be described. FIG. 22-5 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern selection table in a tabular format. The development effect pattern selection table is stored in the ROM 121.

The development effect pattern selection table includes the development effect pattern selection table when the special development effect cannot be selected at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-5 (A) and the special development at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-5 (B). The development effect pattern selection table when the effect can be selected, the development effect pattern selection table when the special development effect cannot be selected in the fourth special reach in FIG. 22-5 (C), and the fourth special reach in FIG. 22-5 (D). When special development effect can be selected When development effect pattern selection table is included.

The development effect pattern selection table when the special development effect cannot be selected at the time of the third special reach is used when it is determined in the special development effect selection table at the time of the third special reach that the special development effect cannot be selected. The development effect pattern selection table when the special development effect can be selected at the time of the third special reach is used when it is determined in the special development effect selection table at the time of the third special reach that the special development effect can be selected.

The development effect pattern selection table when the special development effect cannot be selected at the time of the fourth special reach is used when it is determined in the special development effect selection table at the time of the fourth special reach that the special development effect cannot be selected. The development effect pattern selection table when the special development effect can be selected at the time of the fourth special reach is used when it is determined in the special development effect selection table at the time of the fourth special reach that the special development effect can be selected.

In the development effect pattern selection table of FIGS. 22-5 (A) to (D), the random number SR3 (numerical range of 0 to 59) for determining the development effect pattern selection as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control CPU 120. A total of 60 numerical values are assigned to a plurality of types of development production patterns. For SR3, the number of allocated random number SR3 values is shown for the sake of clarity. In each development effect pattern, a combination of a self-sufficient continuous striking effect pattern executed when the self-sufficient continuous striking is performed and an auto continuous striking effect pattern executed when the auto continuous striking is performed is set. The combination is selected.

First, the table selected when the third super reach is executed will be described. In the development effect pattern selection table shown in FIG. 22-5 (A), in which the special development effect cannot be selected, the meter level reaches the maximum L5 by repeated hits, and the self-powered continuous hit effect pattern shifts to the first development effect, and the meter level is repeatedly hit. The effect pattern A1 is a combination of the automatic continuous hitting effect patterns that reach the maximum L5 and shift to the first development effect, the self-powered continuous hitting effect pattern that shifts to the second development effect to the maximum L10 by the meter level, and the meter level. The data is set so that there is a magnitude relationship of "A1> A2" with respect to the effect pattern A2, which is a combination of the auto-continuous stroke effect patterns in which the maximum L5 is reached by repeated hits and shifts to the first development effect.

In the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (B) in which the special development effect can be selected, the effect pattern B1 and the effect pattern A2 in which the same effect pattern as the effect pattern A1 is set are set. The data for the production pattern B2 and the production pattern B3, which automatically shifts to the special development production after reaching the maximum L10 by repeated hits, have a magnitude relationship of "B1> B2> B3". It is set.

Next, the table selected when the fourth super reach is executed will be described. In the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (C) in which the special development effect cannot be selected, the effect pattern C1 in which the effect pattern similar to the effect pattern A1 is set and the effect pattern similar to the effect pattern A2 are displayed. The data of the set effect pattern C2 is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of "C1 <C2", contrary to the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (A).

In the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (D) in which the special development effect can be selected, the effect patterns D1 and the effect patterns A2 and B2 in which the same effect patterns as the effect patterns A1 and B1 are set are set. With respect to the effect pattern D2 in which is set and the effect pattern D3 in which the same effect pattern as the effect pattern B3 is set, “D1 <D2 <D3” is reversed from the development effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-5 (B). The data is set so that there is a magnitude relationship.

In the case of self-sufficient striking, in the development effect pattern selection table shown in FIGS. 22-5 (A) to (D), when the special development effect cannot be selected for the third super reach, the meter level is maximized from L5 to the first. When the rate of transition to the development effect is set higher than the rate at which the meter level shifts from L10 to the second development effect at the maximum, and the special development effect can be selected, the data is set to have the opposite ratio relationship. It is set.

Further, in the development effect pattern selection table shown in FIGS. 22-5 (A) to (D), the meter level starts from L5 at the maximum when the special development effect cannot be selected for the fourth super reach in the case of self-sufficient continuous hitting. When the rate of transition to the first development effect is set lower than the ratio of the meter level shifting from L10 to the second development effect at the maximum, and the special development effect can be selected, the opposite ratio relationship is obtained. The data is set.

Then, in the development effect pattern selection table of FIGS. 22-5 (A) to (D), in the case of self-sufficient continuous striking, the fourth super reach is more than the third super reach when the special development effect can be selected. The data is set so that the rate of transition from the meter level MAX to the special development effect is high. And the 4th super reach is more expected to be a big hit than the 3rd super reach.

With such a setting, in the case of self-sufficient repeated hits, the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is set in the relationship of "first development production <second development production <special development production", so the level of the meter value rises. Therefore, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

In the case of automatic continuous striking, in the development effect pattern selection table of FIGS. 22-5 (A) to (D), when the special development effect cannot be selected for each of the third super reach and the fourth super reach, the meter level The data is set so that when only the effect of shifting from L5 to the first development effect is selected and the special development effect can be selected, the effect of shifting from the meter level MAX to the special development effect can be selected.

With such a setting, in the case of automatic repeated hits, the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is set in the relationship of "first development effect <special development effect", so as the level of the meter value rises, the player It is possible to raise the expectation for the big hit. Then, in the case of automatic continuous hitting, the meter level is less likely to rise than in the case of self-repeated hitting, but at a predetermined rate, the effect of shifting from the meter level MAX to the special development effect can be selected, so that automatic continuous hitting is performed. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered.

FIG. 22-6 is a flowchart showing a continuous hitting effect setting process. The continuous hitting effect setting process is a process executed in the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process.

In the continuous hitting effect setting process, by checking the fluctuation pattern command received at the start of the variable display this time based on the data in the command reception buffer, is the third super reach specified for the variable display executed this time? Whether or not it is determined (261FS001). This is because in the present embodiment, the meter effect is executed in the fluctuation pattern between the third super reach and the fourth super reach as described above.

When the third super reach is specified for this variable display, the data of the random number SR2 for determining the special development effect selection is extracted, and the special development effect selection table at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-4 (A) is displayed. It is used to select and determine whether the special development effect can be selected or not (261FS002).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the decision to select the special development effect has been made in 261FS002 (261FS003). When it is decided that the special development effect cannot be selected by the confirmation in 261FS003, the data of the random number SR3 for determining the development effect pattern selection is extracted, and the special at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-5 (A) is extracted. When the development effect cannot be selected Using the development effect pattern selection table, the effect pattern of the continuous hitting effect of the self-powered continuous hitting and the automatic continuous hitting is selected and determined (261FS004), and the process proceeds to 261FS013. The effect pattern of the continuous hitting effect of the self-powered continuous hitting and the automatic continuous hitting also includes data for setting the timing of the operation valid period.

On the other hand, when it is decided that the special development effect can be selected by the confirmation in 261FS003, the data of the random number SR3 for determining the development effect pattern selection is extracted, and at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-5 (B). When the special development effect can be selected Using the development effect pattern selection table, the effect pattern of the continuous hitting effect of the self-powered continuous hitting and the automatic continuous hitting is selected and determined (261FS005), and the process proceeds to 261FS013.

When the fluctuation this time is not the third super reach according to the above-mentioned 261FS001, it is determined whether or not the fourth super reach is specified for the variable display executed this time (261FS006).

When the third super reach is specified for this variable display, the data of the random number SR2 for determining the special development effect selection is extracted, and the special development effect selection table at the time of the fourth special reach in FIG. 22-4 (B) is displayed. It is used to select and determine whether the special development effect can be selected or not (261FS006).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the decision to select the special development effect is made in 261FS006 (261FS008). When it is decided that the special development effect cannot be selected by the confirmation in 261FS008, the data of the random number SR3 for determining the development effect pattern selection is extracted, and the special at the time of the fourth special reach in FIG. 22-5 (C) is extracted. When the development effect cannot be selected Using the development effect pattern selection table, the effect pattern of the continuous hitting effect of the self-powered continuous hitting and the automatic continuous hitting is selected and determined (261FS009), and the process proceeds to 261FS013. On the other hand, when it is decided that the special development effect can be selected by the confirmation in 261FS008, the data of the random number SR3 for determining the development effect pattern selection is extracted, and at the time of the fourth special reach in FIG. 22-5 (D). When the special development effect can be selected Using the development effect pattern selection table, the effect pattern of the continuous hitting effect of the self-powered continuous hitting and the automatic continuous hitting is selected and determined (261FS010), and the process proceeds to 261FS013.

When the fluctuation this time is not the fourth super reach according to the above-mentioned 261FS006, it is determined whether or not the second super reach is specified for the variable display executed this time (261FS011).

When the second super reach is specified for the variable display this time, it is determined to execute the plurality of specific image display effect patterns described later with reference to FIG. 22-9 (261FS012). Then, by setting the data for executing the determined plurality of specific image display effect patterns, the plurality of specific image display effect patterns are set (261F014), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the first super reach is specified, the process is terminated because the effect is set in the setting process other than the continuous hit effect setting process.

In 261FS013, the continuous hitting effect pattern is set (261F013) by setting the data for executing the determined effect pattern based on the determination of the effect pattern in 261FS004, 261FS005, 261FS009, and 261FS010, and the process is terminated. .. In this way, when the effect pattern of the continuous hit effect is set in the continuous hit effect process, the continuous hit effect with the set effect pattern is executed as shown in FIG. 22-1 for example.

FIG. 22-7 is a flowchart showing the continuous hitting effect processing. The continuous striking effect process is a process executed in the variable display during effect process (S172) in the effect control process process.

In the continuous striking effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period in the effect pattern set in the continuous striking effect setting process of FIG. 22-1 is in effect (261FS021). Whether or not the operation is valid is provided in the effect pattern set in the continuous hit effect setting process based on checking the time value of the variable display timer that measures the time from the start of the variable display. Check based on whether or not the operation is valid during the valid period.

If 261FS021 is not in the operation valid period, the process ends. On the other hand, when the operation is valid in 261FS021, it is confirmed whether or not the push button 31B has been operated based on the confirmation whether or not the detection signal has been input from the push sensor 35B (261FS022). When the push button 31B is not operated, the process ends. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is being operated, it is determined whether or not a long-pressing operation in which the push button 31B is continuously operated is being executed (261FS023).

When the long press operation is not executed in 261FS023, that is, when the short press operation is performed, the meter effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of self-pressing set in 261FS013 of the continuous stroke effect setting process is executed (261FS026). , 261FS027. As a result, when the effect pattern of the continuous hit effect is set in 261FS013 of the hit effect setting process, if the self-powered continuous hit is executed within the operation valid period during the variable display, the self-powered continuous hit effect among the set effect patterns A meter effect with a pattern is executed.

On the other hand, when the long press operation is executed in 261FS023, the continuous operation time of the long press operation is measured by another process, and the automatic continuous hit execution condition such that the long press operation continuation period is, for example, 1 second or more is satisfied. It is determined whether or not it has been done (261FS024). If the auto-continuous hit execution condition is not satisfied, the process ends. On the other hand, when the automatic continuous striking execution condition is satisfied, the meter effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of automatic continuous striking set in 261FS013 of the continuous striking effect setting process is executed (261FS025), and the process proceeds to 261FS027. As a result, when the effect pattern of the continuous hit effect is set in 261FS013 of the continuous hit effect setting process, when the automatic continuous hit is executed within the operation valid period during the variable display, among the set effect patterns, the auto continuous hit effect A meter effect with a pattern is executed.

In 261FS025, the predetermined time interval in which it is determined that the continuous striking is executed by the automatic continuous striking is longer than the time interval in which it is determined that the self-repeated striking is executed in 261FS026 (see FIG. 22-2). As a result, the rate of change of the meter value display level in response to the automatic continuous striking is controlled to be slower than the rate of change of the meter value display level in response to the self-repeated continuous striking.

In 261FS027, for example, it is determined whether or not it is the time when the effect development condition of the self-powered continuous striking effect pattern or the auto continuous striking effect pattern set in 261FS013 of the continuous striking effect setting process is satisfied (261FS027). In this case, when the effect development condition is satisfied, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is the development timing of the self-powered continuous hitting effect pattern or the automatic continuous hitting effect pattern set in 261FS013 of the hitting effect setting process. That is, or the meter display has reached the meter level required for the development of the effect of the self-repeated continuous striking effect pattern or the automatic continuous striking effect pattern set in 261FS013 of the striking effect setting process.

If it is not the time when the production development condition is satisfied in 261FS027, the process ends. On the other hand, when the production development condition is satisfied in 261FS027, the level of the meter display of the current meter image 261F001 is the level required at the time of transition to the development production in the currently executing production pattern (first development production transition). By confirming whether or not the level L5 is reached at the time and the level L10 at the time of the transition to the second development effect, it is determined whether or not the level of the meter display for the development effect is insufficient (261FS028). ).

When the meter display level is not insufficient in 261FS028, the process proceeds to 261FS010 described later. On the other hand, when the meter display level is not insufficient in 261FS028, the meter display adjustment effect is executed (261FS029), and the process proceeds to 261FS010. The meter display adjustment effect changes the meter display up to level L5 when the first development effect shifts, and changes the meter display up to level L10 when the second development effect shifts, as a display that makes up for the shortage of the meter display level described above. It is a production that adjusts the level to be made. As a result, when shifting to the development effect, the effect shifts after reaching the maximum level of the meter display determined for each development effect. Then, an effect that develops into a predetermined effect in the effect pattern currently being executed is executed (261FS030). As a result, the transition to the first development effect, the second development effect, or the special development effect as shown in FIG. 22-1 is performed. After that, the process ends.

<Example of meter display adjustment effect according to the operation different from repeated hits>
Next, when the meter display adjustment effect is executed in S261FS028 of FIG. 22-7, the effect of finally reaching the specific stage of the meter level (level L5, level L10, etc.) corresponding to the type of development effect. Based on the fact that, before the execution of the above, when the effect mode of the meter display has not reached the specific stage, a specific operation different from the repeated hits of the push button 31B by the player, such as the tilting operation of the stick controller 31A, is detected. , An example will be described in which an effect of changing the effect mode of the meter display can be executed with a degree of change higher than the degree of change of the effect mode of the meter display according to the player's repeated hits.

FIG. 22-8 is a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing an example in which the meter display adjustment effect is executed based on the player executing a specific operation different from the continuous striking. FIG. 22-8 shows the operation of the stick controller 31A when, for example, the effect pattern B3 (meter level L10 → MAX + special development effect) is executed among the effect patterns of the meter effect shown in FIG. 22-5. It is a display screen view of the image display device 5 which shows the example which the meter display adjustment effect was executed.

As shown in FIG. 22-8 (A), when the effect development condition of the effect pattern B3 is satisfied, the meter display of the meter image 261F001 is insufficient compared to the preset level L10 as the meter level before developing into the special development effect (as shown in FIG. 22-8 (A)). Level L5). In such a case, as shown in 261FS030 of FIG. 22-7, a meter display adjustment effect for adjusting the meter level to the level L10 is executed. As another example of this meter display adjustment effect, as shown in FIGS. 22-8 (B) and 22-8, the stick controller 31A as an operation detecting means capable of performing a specific operation different from the push button 31B to be repeatedly hit is operated. It is possible to execute a meter display adjustment effect that adjusts the meter level to level L10 when the operation (operation) of the stick controller 31A by the player is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

As shown in FIG. 22-8 (B), the meter display adjustment effect is started on the condition that the meter display is insufficient when the effect development condition is satisfied, and the stick controller image 261F003 imitating the stick controller 31A is displayed. As a result, a suggestion effect suggesting the operation (operation) of the stick controller 31A by the player is executed. Then, when the operation (operation) of the stick controller 31A by the player is detected within the period during which such a suggestion effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 22-8 (C), the meter of the meter image 261F001 Meter display adjustment is performed to increase the display to level L10, which is defined as the level at which the display shifts to the development effect in this example.

In the example of FIG. 22-8, the stick controller 31A has been described as an operation detecting means capable of a specific operation that is a condition for executing the meter display adjustment effect, but the stick controller 31A is not limited to this, and a rotary jog controller or the like may be used. Any motion detecting means may be used as long as it is an motion detecting means capable of performing a specific motion different from that of the push button 31B to be repeatedly hit.

Further, when the meter display adjustment effect is executed based on the motion detection of the motion detection means capable of a specific motion different from the push button 31B to be repeatedly hit, the meter display is performed in a plurality of steps by detecting one motion (operation). The level of the meter display may be increased so as to eliminate the insufficient level at once by detecting one operation (operation).

As shown in FIG. 22-8, when the specific condition that the meter display is insufficient when the effect development condition is satisfied is satisfied, the effect mode such as the display of the meter value of the meter display is finally established in the meter effect. When executing the meter display adjustment effect to reach a specific stage, even if the stage of the meter display level changes too much, the effect of the meter display based on the detection of a specific operation different from the repeated hits by the player. By the effect of changing the mode, it is possible to prevent the effect of changing the mode of the meter display from causing a sense of discomfort.

[Explanation of feature section 262F]
Next, the feature unit 262F will be described. The feature unit 262F detected the movement of the player with respect to a plurality of specific images that can suggest that the movement of the player can be detected a plurality of times within the operation valid period in order to promote the movement of the player. Based on this, when one specific image can be erased, a plurality of specific image display effects that increase the number of display of the specific image according to the elapse of the detection valid period will be described.

FIG. 22-9 is a display screen view of the image display device 5 showing an example of a plurality of specific image display effects. FIG. 22-9 shows an effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol, but from the viewpoint of preventing complication of the drawing, the image showing the variable display of the decorative symbol is omitted. ing. As described above, the plurality of specific image display effects are effects in which the effect patterns are set and executed in, for example, 261FS011 and 261FS014 in FIGS. 22-6. The plurality of specific image display effects are executed during the variable display based on the variable pattern.

As shown in FIG. 22-9 (A), the multiple specific image display effect is executed after the SP reach notification image 261F0005 that notifies that the SP reach is executed is displayed at the start of the SP reach (super reach). Will be done.

In the plurality of specific image display effects, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (A), the meter image 261F001 is displayed in a horizontal format at the lower part of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B), the specific button image 261F010, which is an image imitating the push button 31B, is a specific image from the specific display area such as the central portion in the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 22-9 (B) to (E), a plurality of specific button images 261F010 are sequentially displayed, and are moved and displayed radially from the central portion to the outside according to the passage of time. It is executed in the production mode. As a result, the number of display of the specific button image 261F010 is increased as the operation valid period elapses.

When a plurality of specific image display effects are executed, in the corner of the display area of the image display device 5, a button image 261F002 composed of an image imitating the push button 31B and a character image of "continuous hitting!", And an operation The valid period image 261F004 is displayed. The display of the button image 261F002 and the display of the plurality of specific button images 261F010 that are displayed in an increasing manner promote the operation of the player who operates (continuously hits) the push button 31B for the player. Then, by displaying the plurality of specific button images 261F010, it is possible to suggest that the operation of the player can be detected a plurality of times within the operation valid period.

By the action of the player, operations such as self-sufficient continuous striking and automatic continuous striking are executed for the push button 31B, and when the operation is detected, the detection is performed as shown in FIGS. 22-9 (D) and 22-9 (E). In response to this, one of the plurality of specific button images 261F010 is erased in a predetermined order. When the specific button image 261F010 is created, the effect image 261F008 and the number (“10”) as predetermined images that make it possible to identify that the specific button image 261F010 has been deleted in the vicinity of the deleted specific button image 261F010. Image 261F009 is displayed. The numerical image 261F009 is also an image suggesting an increase in the level of the meter display by showing the number of points where the level of the meter display of "10" is increased by one step.

The specific button image 261F010 that was not erased by such an operation of the player is moved and displayed to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and is displayed as shown in FIGS. 22-9 (D) and 22-9 (D) and (E). The specific button image 261F010 that has reached the end of the display area is erased in such a manner that it goes out of the display area. In this way, the image erased in such a manner that it goes out of the display area is excluded from the deletion target corresponding to the operation of the player's push button 31, so that the player's motion detection is invalidated. Is the target.

In the specific button image 261F010, one image may be deleted by detecting the operation of one operation by the operation of the player, and the specific button image 261F010 may be deleted a plurality of times (for example, 2 to 3 times) by the operation of the player. One image may be deleted each time the operation is detected. Further, a plurality of images (for example, 2 to 3 images) may be deleted by detecting the operation of one operation by the operation of the player.

Data setting for executing such a plurality of specific image display effects is performed in the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process. Then, the plurality of specific image display effects during the variable display are performed in the variable display during effect process (S172).

By executing such a plurality of specific image display effects, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) In order to promote the movement of the player, the push button 31B by the movement of the player is obtained for a plurality of specific button images 261F010 that can suggest that the movement of the player can be detected a plurality of times within the operation valid period. In the case where one specific image can be erased based on the detection of the operation of, the number of display of the specific button image 261F010 is increased according to the elapse of the operation valid period, so that the fun of the production is improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2) By moving and displaying a plurality of specific button images 261F010 after they are displayed, it is possible to give a visual impact to the player by using the specific images.

(3) The specific button image 261F010 that has reached the outside of the display area of the image display device 5 is erased and the operation of the push button 31B by the operation of the player is invalidated, so that the display area of the image display device 5 It is possible to prevent the display number of the specific button image 261F010 from becoming excessive.

(4) In the vicinity of the specific button image 261F010 erased in response to the operation of the push button 31B by the operation of the player, the effect image 261F008 and numbers (as predetermined images that make it possible to identify that the specific image has been erased) "10") By displaying the image 261F009, it is possible for the player to recognize which specific button image 261F010 has been deleted.

(5) In the image display device 5, the display of the plurality of specific button images 261F010 is started from the specific display area such as the central portion of the display area, so that the display of the plurality of specific button images 261F010 becomes regular. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of displaying the plurality of specific button images 261F010 from becoming a disorganized effect.

[Explanation of feature section 263F]
Next, the feature unit 263F will be described. The feature unit 263F displays the operation validity period during the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, but when the operation of the push button 31B by the player's operation is not detected, the effect is produced. In the first period such as the first half, it is considered that the movement of the player is detected after the operation valid period elapses, and the meter effect is executed. However, in the second period such as the second half of the effect, the meter effect is executed. Explains the effect of controlling the restrictions.

In FIG. 22-10, the effect executed when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected within the operation valid period differs between the first half and the second half of the effect period during the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol. It is a display screen view of the image display device 5 which shows the effect control for each period to execute.

In FIGS. 22-10, (A) and (B) show the effects to be executed in the first period, which is the first period within the effect period, and (C) to (G) show the effects to be executed in the second period within the effect period. The production to be performed in a certain late period is shown. Such period-specific effect control may be executed as a super reach effect as described in the feature unit 261F, or may be executed as a super reach effect as described in the feature unit 262F.

As the effects executed in the previous period in the period-based effects, as shown in FIGS. 22-10 (A) and 22-10 (B), the meter image 261F001 is displayed in landscape format at the bottom of the screen, and the previous period character image 261F006 is displayed. When the movement of the push button 31B due to the movement of the player is detected in response to the movement promotion effect by the specific button image 261F010 within the operation valid period, the meter value of the meter image 261F001 is changed according to the detection determination. An increasing meter effect is performed.

As the effects executed in the previous period in the period-based effects, as shown in FIGS. 22-10 (A) and 22-10 (B), the meter image 261F001 is displayed in landscape format at the bottom of the screen, and the previous period character image 261F006 is displayed. When the operation of the push button 31B by the operation of the player is detected in response to the operation promotion effect by the specific button image 261F010 within the operation valid period, the meter value of the meter image 261F001 is set according to the detection determination. An increasing first meter effect is performed.

In the second meter effect executed in the previous period in the period-based effect, the meter image 261F001 is displayed in a vertical format on the left side of the screen and the character image 261F007 in the previous period is displayed in the same manner as the effect shown in FIG. 22-1. When the movement of the push button 31B due to the movement of the player is detected in response to the movement promotion effect by the specific button image 261F010 within the operation valid period, the meter value of the meter image 261F001 increases according to the detection determination. The meter effect is executed.

In the second meter effect, as shown in FIG. 22-1, it is possible to shift to the first development effect, the second development effect, or the special development effect according to the level of the meter value. However, in the second meter effect, the level of the meter value does not automatically change to the level of the predetermined meter value when the effect development condition is satisfied, but according to the level of the meter value at the end of the operation valid period. , 1st development production, 2nd development production, or special development production.

For example, as shown in FIG. 22-10 (D), if the meter value is level L5 or more and less than level L10 at the end of the operation valid period, the effect of shifting to the first development effect is executed. Further, if the meter value is level L10 at the end of the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 22-10 (E), the effect of shifting to the second development effect is executed. Further, if the meter value is level MAX at the end of the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 22-10 (F), the effect of shifting to the special development effect is executed. However, since the production for each period is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns as described later, the meter value may reach the level L10 but not the level MAX even if the high-speed continuous hitting is performed by oneself. The effect control that occurs is performed.

Further, when the operation of the push button 31B by the operation of the player is not detected at all at the end of the operation valid period, control is performed to shift to a special effect different from the development effect as shown in FIG. 22-10 (G). Is done. The special production is a production in which the fun of the production is hardly felt, for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit is not suggested.

Next, the data table used in the effect control for each period will be described. First, in the period-specific effect control, it is selected and determined whether or not the special development effect can be selected by using the special development effect selection table similar to FIG. 22-4.

FIG. 22-11 is a diagram showing the effect pattern selection table used in the latter stage of the effect control for each period in a tabular format. The effect pattern selection table is stored in the ROM 121.

The effect pattern selection table includes the effect pattern selection table when the third special reach special development effect cannot be selected in FIG. 22-11 (A) and the third special reach special development effect selection in FIG. 22-11 (B). The production pattern selection table when possible, the production pattern selection table when the fourth special reach special development effect cannot be selected in FIG. 22-11 (C), and the special development effect during the fourth special reach in FIG. 22-11 (D). Includes an effect pattern selection table when selectable.

When the special development effect cannot be selected at the time of the third special reach, the effect pattern selection table is set when the special development effect cannot be selected in the special development effect selection table at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-4 (A). Used. The effect pattern selection table when the special development effect can be selected at the time of the third special reach is used when it is determined that the special development effect can be selected in the special development effect selection table at the time of the third special reach in FIG. 22-4.

When the special development effect cannot be selected at the time of the 4th special reach, the effect pattern selection table is set when the special development effect cannot be selected in the special development effect selection table at the time of the 4th special reach in FIG. 22-4 (B). Used. The effect pattern selection table when the special development effect can be selected at the time of the fourth special reach is used when it is determined in the special development effect selection table at the time of the fourth special reach that the special development effect can be selected.

In the effect pattern selection table of FIGS. 22-11 (A) to (D), the random number SR4 (0 to 119) for determining the effect pattern selection in the latter period in the period-specific effect as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control CPU 120. A total of 120 numerical values (in the numerical range of) are assigned to a plurality of types of late production patterns. For SR4, the number of allocated random number SR4 values is shown for the sake of clarity. In each effect pattern, the same effect pattern is set when the self-powered continuous hit is performed and when the auto-continuous hit is performed, and such an effect pattern is selected.

First, the table selected when the third super reach is executed will be described. In the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11 (A), which is used when it is determined that the special development effect cannot be selected, the meter level becomes the minimum L0 to the maximum L10 by repeated hits, and the meter at the end of the operation valid period. Depending on the value, only the special effect, the first development effect, or the effect pattern a that can shift to the second development effect is selected. Next, in the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11 (B) used when it is determined that the special development effect can be selected, the same effect pattern b1 as the effect pattern a and the meter level are minimized L0 to 0 by repeated hits. The maximum is L10, and one of the special effect, the first development effect, the second development effect, and the effect pattern b2 that can shift to the special development effect is selected according to the meter value at the end of the operation valid period. To. The data of the effect pattern b1 and the effect pattern b2 are set so as to have a magnitude relationship of "b1> b2".

Next, the table selected when the fourth super reach is executed will be described. In the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11 (C) used when it is determined that the special development effect cannot be selected, only the same effect pattern c as the effect pattern a is selected. Next, in the effect pattern selection table of FIG. 22-11 (D) used when it is determined that the special development effect can be selected, the same effect pattern c1 as the effect pattern b1 and the same effect pattern c2 as the effect pattern b2 are used. Is selected. The data of the effect pattern c1 and the effect pattern c2 are set so as to have a magnitude relationship of "c1 <c2". And the 4th super reach is more expected to be a big hit than the 3rd super reach.

With such a setting, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is set in the relationship of "first development production, second development production <special development production", so that as the level of the meter value rises, the player's Expectations for big hits can be increased.

The effect pattern shown in FIG. 22-11 is set in the continuous hit effect setting process in which the effect pattern to be executed is selected and determined by the same process as in FIG. 22-6 executed in the variable display start setting process of S171. Will be done.

FIG. 22-12 is a flowchart showing the second continuous striking effect processing. The second continuous striking effect process is a process executed in the variable display during effect process (S172) in the effect control process process, and is a process of executing an effect in a later effect pattern in the period-based effect. In the variable display during effect processing (S172), the effect of the previous period effect pattern in the period-based effect is executed by the first continuous hit effect process, and the effect of the previous period effect pattern in the period-based effect is the second continuous hit effect. Executed by processing.

In the second continuous striking effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid in the later effect pattern in the period-based effect set in the continuous striking effect setting process executed in the variable display start setting process of S171. (261FS031). Whether or not the operation is valid is provided in the effect pattern set in the continuous hit effect setting process based on checking the time value of the variable display timer that measures the time from the start of the variable display. Check based on whether or not the operation is valid during the valid period.

If 261FS031 is not in the operation valid period, the process ends. On the other hand, when the operation is valid on the 261FS031, it is confirmed whether or not the push button 31B has been operated based on the confirmation whether or not the detection signal has been input from the push sensor 35B (261FS032). When the push button 31B is not operated, the process ends. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is being operated, it is determined whether or not a long-pressing operation in which the push button 31B is continuously operated is being executed (261FS033).

When the long press operation is not executed in 261FS033, that is, when the short press operation is performed, the meter effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of self-pressing effect set in the continuous stroke effect setting process is executed (261FS036), and 261FS037 is executed. Proceed to. As a result, when the self-powered continuous striking is executed within the operation valid period during the variable display, the meter effect in the self-powered continuous striking effect pattern is executed.

On the other hand, when the long press operation is executed in 261FS033, the continuous operation time of the long press operation is measured by another process, and the automatic continuous hit execution condition such that the long press operation continuation period is, for example, 1 second or more is satisfied. It is determined whether or not it has been done (261FS034). If the auto-continuous hit execution condition is not satisfied, the process ends. On the other hand, when the auto continuous striking execution condition is satisfied, the meter effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of auto continuous striking is executed (261FS035), and the process proceeds to 261FS037. As a result, when the automatic continuous striking is executed within the operation valid period during the variable display, the meter effect in the auto continuous striking effect pattern is executed.

In 261FS035, the predetermined time interval in which it is determined that the continuous striking is executed by the automatic continuous striking is longer than the time interval in which it is determined that the self-repeated striking is executed in 261FS030 (see FIG. 22-2). As a result, the rate of change of the meter value display level in response to the automatic continuous striking is controlled to be slower than the rate of change of the meter value display level in response to the self-repeated continuous striking.

In 261FS037, for example, it is determined whether or not it is at the end of the operation valid period (261FS037). If it is not the end of the operation validity period, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is the end of the operation valid period, it is determined whether or not it is the time when the first development effect, the second development effect, or the effect development condition for the special development effect is satisfied (261FS038). In this case, when the production development condition is satisfied, the meter value level is L5 to L9, the meter value level is L10, and the meter value level is MAX. That is.

When it is not the time when the effect development condition is satisfied in 261FS027, it is determined whether or not the operation is detected even once during the operation valid period (261FS040). If an operation is detected more than once during the operation valid period, the process ends. If no operation is detected during the operation valid period, the process for shifting to the special effect is executed (S261FS041), and the process ends.

By executing the control described above, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) As shown in FIG. 22-10, when the operation valid period is displayed but the operation due to the player's action is not detected, in the previous period in the period-specific production, the player's operation detection valid period has elapsed. The meter effect is executed assuming that the operation due to the movement is detected, but in the latter half of the period-based effect, the execution of the meter effect is restricted, which causes diversity in the suggestion effect, which makes the effect interesting. Can be improved to improve the interest of the game.

(2) By executing the development effect according to the level of the meter value as shown in FIGS. 22-10 (D) to (F), the execution is being performed based on the detected operation amount by the player's movement. By shifting from the production of the above to one of a plurality of types of development effects, the content of the production changes, so that it is possible to promote the player to perform an action.

(3) As shown in (G) of FIG. 22-10, when the operation by the movement of the player is not detected in the latter half of the period-specific effect, the game is played by shifting from the running effect to the special effect. It is possible to make the player recognize that if the person does not move, the process shifts to the special effect.

(4) Next, when it is considered that the continuous hitting is executed based on the automatic continuous hitting determination by S261FS035 and S261FS036 in FIG. 22-12, it is longer than when the player's own continuous hitting is detected. By assuming that the player's repeated hits have been executed at the detection interval, it is possible to encourage the player who pays attention to the progress of the effect such as the transition of the effect to perform the repeated hits by himself / herself.

[Modification example relating to feature portions 261F to 263F]
(1) When the meter effects as shown in FIGS. 22-1, 22-8, and 22-12 are executed, the first development effect, the second development effect, and the special development effect are performed. When each of the meter value levels that are the conditions for transition to the development effect is reached, the level of the meter that is the condition for the transition to the development effect is reached, such as displaying a special operation on the character image displayed at that time. An effect of notifying the arrival may be executed. In that case, the higher the level of the meter value, which is the condition for shifting to the development effect, the more conspicuous the character image operation effect mode may be.

(2) When the meter effects as shown in FIGS. 22-1, 22-8, and 22-12 are executed, the first development effect, the second development effect, and the special development effect are performed. When each of the meter value levels, which is the transition condition for the development effect, is reached, a different character image is newly displayed for each meter value level, which is the transition condition, and the character image is changed to change the development effect. An effect of notifying that the level of the meter, which is a transition condition, has been reached may be executed. In that case, every time the level of the meter value that is the transition condition to the development effect is reached, a character image that is newly displayed when the level of the meter value that is the transition condition to the next development effect is reached is suggested. The display may be executed.

(3) When the meter effects as shown in FIGS. 22-1, 22-8, and 22-12 are executed, the first development effect, the second development effect, and the special development effect are performed. When each of the meter value levels, which is the condition for transition to the development effect, is reached, the level of the meter, which is the condition for the transition to the development effect, has been reached, such as changing the display color of the meter image 261F001 to a special color. You may execute the effect of notifying by changing the effect mode. In that case, the higher the level of the meter value, which is the condition for shifting to the development effect, the more conspicuous the effect may be.

(4) As the above-mentioned meter effect, an example in which the meter value level changes by one level in the meter image 261F001 meter display image when one operation by the player's movement is detected is shown. However, it may be changed by a plurality of levels when one operation is detected. Further, as the above-mentioned meter effect, one level may be changed when a plurality of operations (for example, 2 to 3 times) are detected.

(5) The above-mentioned meter effect may be executed during a part of the operation valid period set in the fluctuation display in the specific fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation in the specific fluctuation pattern. It may be executed during the entire operation valid period set in the display.

(6) Although the above-mentioned display of the operation validity period is performed in a meter display format such as the operation validity period image 261F004, the operation validity period may be displayed as a numerical image.

(7) The transition to the first development effect, the transition to the second development effect, and the transition to the special development effect by the meter effect based on the operation detection by the player's movement within the operation valid period as described above. , It may be possible to execute when the self-sufficient operation is detected for almost the entire operation valid period, and the self-sufficient continuous striking may be performed for a part of the operation valid period (for example, 50% period). It may be enabled when an operation is detected.

(8) The transition to the first development effect, the transition to the second development effect, and the transition to the special development effect by the meter effect based on the operation detection by the movement of the player within the operation valid period as described above. , It may be possible to execute when an auto-striking operation is detected for almost the entire operation valid period, and auto-striking may be performed for a part of the operation valid period (for example, 50% of the period). It may be enabled when an operation is detected.

It should be noted that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims are included.

1 Pachinko game machine, 31B push button, 35B push sensor, 261F001 meter image, 5 image display device, 120 effect control CPU, 261F010 specific button image, 261F008 effect image, 261F009 numerical image.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
Specific display means to display specific display and
Based on the fact that the detection means detects a predetermined motion of the player different from the continuous motion of the player during the detection valid period of the detection means, the continuous motion deemed determination that the continuous motion is regarded as being executed at a predetermined interval is determined. Action judgment means and
Based on the fact that the continuous movement of the player is detected by the detection means during the detection valid period, it is possible to execute a specific effect capable of changing the effect mode of the specific display in a plurality of stages according to the continuous operation. With a specific production execution means,
Further, the specific effect executing means can change the effect mode of the specific display in a plurality of stages according to the continuous operation at the predetermined interval based on the continuous operation deemed determination by the operation determining means. It is possible to perform specific effects,
The specific effect executing means is
When the specific effect is executed based on the continuous operation deemed determination, the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to a predetermined stage as much as possible, and the interval is shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous operation deemed determination. When the specific effect is executed based on the detection of the continuous movement of the player by the detection means, the effect mode of the specific display can be changed to the maximum up to a specific stage higher than the predetermined stage.
When it is predetermined to execute an effect of changing the effect mode of the specific display to a specified stage higher than the specific stage as the specific effect, the specific display is based on the determination of deemed continuous operation. The specific display is based on the state after the effect mode is changed to the predetermined stage and the continuous operation of the player being detected by the detection means at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval of the continuous operation deemed determination. In each state after the effect mode has changed to the specific stage, the detection means detects the continuous movement of the player, the detection means does not detect the continuous movement of the player, and the case where the continuous movement of the player is not detected. The production mode of the specific display can be reached to the specified stage.
The specific effect is the detection effect is produced if the representation embodiment has reached the predetermined stage of the particular display during the valid period are possible development in the first representation embodiment, the effect of the specific display in said detecting validity A gaming machine in which the effect mode can be developed into a second effect mode when the mode reaches the specific stage.

Images